100% found this document useful (1 vote)

1K views339 pages

BTS PDF

Uploaded by

Hamza Amellouk

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

100% found this document useful (1 vote)

1K views339 pages

BTS PDF

Uploaded by

Hamza Amellouk

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 339

BTS3900L(Ver.

Hardware Description

Issue 08
Date 2014-06-26

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: [email protected]

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

About This Document

Overview
This document describes the functions, specifications, and configurations of the components in
the BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet as well as cable types, cable connections, and connector
specifications. This document serves as a reference for the BTS3900L (Ver.D) site planning and
deployment. BTS3900L (Ver.D) is shortened to BTS3900L in this document.

Product Version
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Product Version

BTS3900L V100R007C00

BTS3900L WCDMA V200R014C00

BTS3900L GSM V100R014C00

BTS3900L LTE V100R005C00

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:

l System engineers
l Base station installation personnel
l Site maintenance personnel

Organization
1 Changes in BTS3900L (Ver.D) Hardware Description

This chapter describes the changes in BTS3900L (Ver.D) Hardware Description.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

2 BTS3900L Cabinet

This chapter describes the exterior, boards, modules, and configurations of the BTS3900L
cabinet, providing reference for planning and deploying the BTS3900L.

3 BTS3900L Modules

A BTS3900L cabinet consists of the following modules: RFU, BBU3900, DCDU-12, fan
assembly, ELU, and optional modules.

4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

This chapter describes the supported input voltage range, configurations of the upper-level
circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, as well as power supply devices
in the BTS3900L.

5 BTS3900L Monitoring System and Monitoring Module

The BTS3900L monitoring system monitors all boards and components in a BTS3900L cabinet.
If any board or component is faulty, an alarm is automatically reported. The UPEU and UEIU
in the BBU collect monitoring signals from boards and components to monitor the ambient
environment of the BTS3900L.

6 BTS3900L Components

This section describes the components of a BTS3900L cabinet.

7 BTS3900L Cables

The BTS3900L cables are classified into the PGND cables, power cables, transmission cables,
CPRI cables, signal cables, and RF cables.

Conventions
Symbol Conventions

The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal
injury.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

Symbol Description

Calls attention to important information, best practices and

tips.
NOTE is used to address information not related to personal
injury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration.

General Conventions

The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in

Courier New.

Command Conventions

The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations

The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt
+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means
the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations

The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving
the pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and

quickly without moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Changes in BTS3900L (Ver.D) Hardware Description...........................................................1
2 BTS3900L Cabinet.........................................................................................................................6
2.1 Exterior of the BTS3900L Cabinet.................................................................................................................................7
2.2 Interior of the BTS3900L Cabinet..................................................................................................................................8
2.3 Application Scenarios of the BTS3900L Cabinet........................................................................................................13
2.3.1 Application Scenario of the BTS3900L Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs................................................13
2.3.2 Application Scenario of the BTS3900L Configured with Both RFUs and RRUs....................................................15
2.4 BTS3900L Engineering Specifications........................................................................................................................17

3 BTS3900L Modules......................................................................................................................20
3.1 RFU..............................................................................................................................................................................21
3.1.1 DRFU.........................................................................................................................................................................21
3.1.2 GRFU.........................................................................................................................................................................25
3.1.3 WRFU........................................................................................................................................................................28
3.1.4 WRFUa Description..................................................................................................................................................32
3.1.5 WRFUd......................................................................................................................................................................36
3.1.6 WRFUe......................................................................................................................................................................40
3.1.7 MRFU........................................................................................................................................................................44
3.1.8 MRFUd......................................................................................................................................................................48
3.1.9 MRFUe......................................................................................................................................................................52
3.1.10 LRFU.......................................................................................................................................................................56
3.1.11 LRFUe.....................................................................................................................................................................60
3.1.12 CRFUd.....................................................................................................................................................................63
3.2 RRU..............................................................................................................................................................................67
3.3 BBU3900......................................................................................................................................................................68
3.3.1 BBU3900...................................................................................................................................................................68
3.3.2 BBU3900 Functions..................................................................................................................................................69
3.3.3 BBU3900 Technical Specifications...........................................................................................................................69
3.3.4 BBU3900 Slot Assignment.......................................................................................................................................69
3.3.5 GTMU.......................................................................................................................................................................97
3.3.6 WMPT.....................................................................................................................................................................105

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

3.3.7 UMPT......................................................................................................................................................................111
3.3.8 LMPT.......................................................................................................................................................................120
3.3.9 WBBP......................................................................................................................................................................125
3.3.10 LBBP.....................................................................................................................................................................131
3.3.11 FAN.......................................................................................................................................................................140
3.3.12 UPEU.....................................................................................................................................................................142
3.3.13 UEIU......................................................................................................................................................................146
3.3.14 USCU.....................................................................................................................................................................147
3.3.15 UTRP.....................................................................................................................................................................150
3.3.16 UBRI......................................................................................................................................................................160
3.3.17 UCIU.....................................................................................................................................................................162
3.4 GATM........................................................................................................................................................................165

4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices........................................................167

4.1 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables.........................................................................168
4.2 Power Distribution Principles for a BTS3900L Cabinet............................................................................................178
4.3 AC/DC Power System................................................................................................................................................181
4.3.1 Modules in the AC/DC Power System....................................................................................................................181
4.3.2 EPU Subrack............................................................................................................................................................182
4.3.3 PMU.........................................................................................................................................................................187
4.3.4 PSU (AC/DC)..........................................................................................................................................................189
4.4 DCDU-12A.................................................................................................................................................................191
4.5 DCDU-12B.................................................................................................................................................................194

5 BTS3900L Monitoring System and Monitoring Module...................................................200

5.1 Principles for Monitoring a BTS3900L Cabinet........................................................................................................201
5.2 Customized Alarm Input Principles for the BTS3900L.............................................................................................203
5.3 BTS3900L Monitoring Module..................................................................................................................................205
5.3.1 Fan Assembly..........................................................................................................................................................205
5.3.2 EMU........................................................................................................................................................................207

6 BTS3900L Components.............................................................................................................209
6.1 Fan Assembly.............................................................................................................................................................210
6.2 ELU............................................................................................................................................................................212

7 BTS3900L Cables.......................................................................................................................213
7.1 BTS3900L Cable List.................................................................................................................................................215
7.2 Cable Connections......................................................................................................................................................222
7.2.1 Power Cable Connections........................................................................................................................................222
7.2.2 Transmission Cable Connections............................................................................................................................225
7.2.3 CPRI Cable Connections.........................................................................................................................................237
7.2.4 RF Cable Connections.............................................................................................................................................257
7.2.5 Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connections......................................................................................................................285
7.2.6 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections....................................................................................................................287

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

7.3 Power Cables..............................................................................................................................................................290

7.3.1 EPU05A-02 Power Cable........................................................................................................................................290
7.3.2 DCDU-12A Input Power Cable...............................................................................................................................291
7.3.3 (Optional) DCDU-12B Input Power Cable.............................................................................................................292
7.3.4 BBU Power Cable...................................................................................................................................................293
7.3.5 Fan Assembly Power Cable.....................................................................................................................................295
7.3.6 RFU Power Cable....................................................................................................................................................296
7.3.7 RRU Power Cable...................................................................................................................................................297
7.3.8 GATM Power Cable................................................................................................................................................300
7.4 Transmission Cables...................................................................................................................................................301
7.4.1 E1/T1 Cable.............................................................................................................................................................301
7.4.2 FE/GE Ethernet Cable.............................................................................................................................................304
7.4.3 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable........................................................................................................................................305
7.4.4 Interconnection Cable Between the FE Electrical Ports..........................................................................................306
7.4.5 Interconnection Cable Between FE Optical Ports...................................................................................................307
7.5 Signal Cables..............................................................................................................................................................307
7.5.1 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU....................................................................................................................307
7.5.2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan Assembly......................................................................................................308
7.5.3 Fan Assembly Cascade Signal Cable......................................................................................................................309
7.5.4 Monitoring Signal Cable for the EMU....................................................................................................................310
7.5.5 BBU interconnection signal cable...........................................................................................................................311
7.5.6 BBU Alarm Cable...................................................................................................................................................313
7.5.7 GPS Clock Signal Cable..........................................................................................................................................314
7.5.8 GPS Jumper.............................................................................................................................................................315
7.5.9 Signal Cable for the ELU........................................................................................................................................315
7.5.10 Monitoring Signal Cable for the GATM...............................................................................................................316
7.5.11 FMUEA-GATM Monitoring Signal Cable...........................................................................................................317
7.5.12 Monitoring Signal Cables for the Temperature Sensor.........................................................................................318
7.5.13 RET Control Signal Cable.....................................................................................................................................319
7.5.14 Cable Between two Combined Base Stations........................................................................................................320
7.5.15 Adapter Used for Local Maintenance....................................................................................................................322
7.6 RF Cables...................................................................................................................................................................323
7.6.1 RF Jumper................................................................................................................................................................323
7.6.2 Inter-RFU RF Signal Cable.....................................................................................................................................323
7.7 CPRI Electrical Cable.................................................................................................................................................324
7.8 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable..............................................................................................................................................324
7.9 PGND Cables.............................................................................................................................................................328
7.10 Equipotential Cables.................................................................................................................................................329

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 1 Changes in BTS3900L (Ver.D) Hardware Description

1 Changes in BTS3900L (Ver.D) Hardware

Description

This chapter describes the changes in BTS3900L (Ver.D) Hardware Description.

08 (2014-06-26)
This is the eighth commercial release.

Compared with issue 07 (2014-02-24), no topic is added.

Compared with issue 07 (2014-02-24), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Topic Change Description

3.3.7 UMPT Changed the signaling specifications of the

boards in LTE FDD mode.
3.3.8 LMPT

3.3.10 LBBP

Compared with issue 07 (2014-02-24), no topic is deleted.

07 (2014-02-24)
This is the seventh commercial release.

Compared with issue 06 (2013-11-28), this issue includes the following new information:
l 4.3 AC/DC Power System and it's child topics
l 7.3.1 EPU05A-02 Power Cable
l 7.5.1 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU
l 7.10 Equipotential Cables
l 7.5.11 FMUEA-GATM Monitoring Signal Cable

Compared with issue 06 (2013-11-28), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 1 Changes in BTS3900L (Ver.D) Hardware Description

Topic Change Description

7.1 BTS3900L Cable List l Added the information of FMUEA-

GATM monitoring signal cable.
l Added the installation position
information of RF jumper when GATM is
configured.

l 2.1 Exterior of the BTS3900L Cabinet Added the information about the BTS3900L
l 2.2 Interior of the BTS3900L Cabinet AC cabinet.

l 2.3.1 Application Scenario of the

BTS3900L Configured with RFUs but
Without RRUs
l 2.3.2 Application Scenario of the
BTS3900L Configured with Both RFUs
and RRUs
l 2.4 BTS3900L Engineering
Specifications
l 4.1 Configurations of Upper-Level
Circuit Breakers and Power Cables
l 4.2 Power Distribution Principles for a
BTS3900L Cabinet
l 7.1 BTS3900L Cable List
l 7.2.1 Power Cable Connections
l 7.2.6 Monitoring Signal Cable
Connections

Compared with issue 06 (2013-11-28), no information is deleted.

06 (2013-11-28)
This is the sixth commercial release.

Compared with issue 05 (2013-08-23), no information is added to or deleted.

Compared with issue 05 (2013-08-23), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Topic Change Description

The whole document Renamed all EPC6 connectors in this

document EPC4 connectors.

3.3.6 WMPT Changed the description of the TST port.

3.3.7 UMPT

3.3.5 GTMU

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 1 Changes in BTS3900L (Ver.D) Hardware Description

Topic Change Description

3.3.8 LMPT

3.3.15 UTRP Added the UTRPa.

5.2 Customized Alarm Input Principles for Modified the configuration about the number
the BTS3900L of customized alarm inputs for monitoring
boards in the BTS3900L.

05 (2013-08-23)
This is the fifth official release.

Compared with issue 04 (2013-05-27), no information is changed or deleted.

Compared with issue 04 (2013-05-27), this issue includes the following new information:
l 7.5.13 RET Control Signal Cable

04 (2013-05-27)
This is the fourth official release.

Compared with issue 03 (2013-02-20), no information is added or deleted.

Compared with issue 03 (2013-02-20), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Topic Change Description

2.3.2 Application Scenario of the Added restrictions on the boards in the base
BTS3900L Configured with Both RFUs stations configured with RFUs and RRUs.
and RRUs

2.4 BTS3900L Engineering Specifications Added the noise specifications of the cabinet.

l 4.4 DCDU-12A Modified the cross-sectional area of the

l 4.5 DCDU-12B cables matching the DC output terminals.

l 3.3.6 WMPT Added specifications of these boards.

l 3.3.7 UMPT
l 3.3.8 LMPT
l 3.3.9 WBBP
l 3.3.10 LBBP

7.8 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable Added information about the classification of
CPRI fiber optic cables and the principles for
selecting CPRI fiber optic cables.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 1 Changes in BTS3900L (Ver.D) Hardware Description

03 (2013-02-20)
This is the third official release.

Compared with 02 (2012-12-30), no information is changed or deleted.

Compared with 02 (2012-12-30), this issue includes the following new information:
l 3.1.4 WRFUa Description
l RF Cable Connections for the WRFUa

02 (2012-12-30)
This is the second commercial release.

Compared with issue 01 (2012-11-08), no information is added or deleted.

Compared with issue 01 (2012-11-08), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Topic Change Description

7.5.5 BBU interconnection signal cable Modified the exterior and length of the BBU
interconnection signal cable connecting two
WBBPfs.

l 7.3.2 DCDU-12A Input Power Cable Added the description of the cables
l 7.3.5 Fan Assembly Power Cable complying with British Standards (BS).

l 7.3.6 RFU Power Cable

l 7.3.4 BBU Power Cable
l 7.3.8 GATM Power Cable

01 (2012-11-08)
This is the first official release.

Compared with issue Draft A (2012-09-15), this issue includes the following new information:
l RF Cable Connections for Mixed RFU Configuration
l 3.3.3 BBU3900 Technical Specifications

Compared with issue Draft A (2012-09-15), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Topic Change Description

4.1 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Changed the data of the minimum

Breakers and Power Cables requirement for the circuit breaker on the
customer equipment.

3.3.7 UMPT Changed the description of indicators on the

UMPT.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 1 Changes in BTS3900L (Ver.D) Hardware Description

Topic Change Description

l 3.1.7 MRFU Added the technical specifications of the

l 3.1.8 MRFUd RFUs.

l 3.1.9 MRFUe
l 3.1.1 DRFU
l 3.1.2 GRFU
l 3.1.3 WRFU
l 3.1.5 WRFUd
l 3.1.6 WRFUe
l 3.1.10 LRFU
l 3.1.11 LRFUe
l 3.1.12 CRFUd

Compared with issue Draft A (2012-09-15), no information is deleted.

Draft A (2012-09-15)
This is the Draft release.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5

2 BTS3900L Cabinet

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the exterior, boards, modules, and configurations of the BTS3900L
cabinet, providing reference for planning and deploying the BTS3900L.

2.1 Exterior of the BTS3900L Cabinet

The BTS3900L cabinet is a vertical cabinet, which is designed in compliance with the IEC297
standard. The BTS3900L (Ver.D) site can be configured with the BTS3900L cabinet and IMS06.

2.2 Interior of the BTS3900L Cabinet

This section describes the interior and components of the BTS3900L cabinets and IMS06
subrack.

2.3 Application Scenarios of the BTS3900L Cabinet

A BTS3900L cabinet can meet different requirements for RF module configurations and spaces
for customer equipment. A BTS3900L can be configured with RFUs or RFUs and RRUs
depending on different scenarios.

2.4 BTS3900L Engineering Specifications

The BTS3900L engineering specifications include input power specifications, equipment
specifications, and environment specifications of the BTS3900L cabinets and IMS06 subrack.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6

2.1 Exterior of the BTS3900L Cabinet

The BTS3900L cabinet is a vertical cabinet, which is designed in compliance with the IEC297
standard. The BTS3900L (Ver.D) site can be configured with the BTS3900L cabinet and IMS06.

BTS3900L cabinets are classified into AC and DC cabinets. Figure 2-1 shows the exteriors of
a BTS3900L AC cabinet and a BTS3900L DC cabinet.

Figure 2-1 Exterior of the BTS3900L cabinet

The BTS3900L DC cabinet can be configured with an IMS06 and then supports AC power. The
following figure shows the exterior of an IMS06.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7

Figure 2-2 Exterior of an IMS06

2.2 Interior of the BTS3900L Cabinet

This section describes the interior and components of the BTS3900L cabinets and IMS06
subrack.

Interior of the BTS3900L Cabinet

Figure 2-3 shows a BTS3900L cabinets. Table 2-1 describes the components in the BTS3900L
cabinets.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8

Figure 2-3 Interior of the BTS3900L cabinets

Table 2-1 Components in the BTS3900L cabinets

No. Module Optional/ Maximum Remarks

Mandatory Quantity

1 Filler panel Optional - To ensure proper ventilation

of the cabinet, install a filler
panel in the slot that is not
configured with an RFU.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9

No. Module Optional/ Maximum Remarks

Mandatory Quantity

2 RFU Mandatory 12 The RFU performs the

following functions:
modulation and
demodulation of baseband
signals and RF signals, data
processing, as well as signal
combination and division.

3 Fan assembly Mandatory 2 The fan assembly dissipates

heat from the cabinet.
The fan assembly is
configured with the
FMUEA, which monitors the
fans and reports alarms.

4 Filler panel Mandatory 2 A filler panel is installed in

the air intake vent.

5 DCDU-12A Mandatory 2 The DCDU-12A provides

DC power for all
components in the cabinet.
When the number of RFUs
which the cabinet configured
beyond six, the cabinet need
to configured two
DCDU-12A.

6 BBU3900 Mandatory 1 The BBU3900 processes

baseband signals and enables
the base station and base
station controller to interact.

7 Cable trough Mandatory - -

8 BBU3900 Optional 1 This 2 U space can house a

BBU in triple-mode base
stations. It is recommended
that this space be reserved
even when only one BBU is
installed.

9 DCDU-12B Optional 1 The 1 U space can house a

DCDU-12B when the
BTS3900L uses DC power
and is configured with RFUs
and RRUs. This DCDU-12B
distributes DC power to
RRUs.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10

No. Module Optional/ Maximum Remarks

Mandatory Quantity

10 Space for Optional - The 1 U space can house a

customer GATM or transmission
equipment equipment in DC input
scenarios. A GATM is
preferentially installed here
and the GATM is powered
by the DCDU-12A. When
the GATM is not required,
the transmission equipment
is installed here.

11 IMS06 subrack Mandatory 1 The IMS06 houses an

EPU05A-02.

12 Filler panel Optional - Filler panels must be

installed in vacant slots
without PSU (R4850G2).

13 PSU(R4850G2) Mandatory 5 The power supply unit (PSU

(R4850G2)) converts 110 V
AC or 220 V AC power into
-48 V DC power.

14 PMU 11A Mandatory 1 The power monitoring unit

11A (PMU 11A) provides
the functions of power
system and battery
management, power
monitoring, and alarm
reporting.

15 EPU05A-02 Mandatory 1 The EPU05A-02 applies to

Subrack separated macro base
stations that use AC power.
This subrack provides DC
power for components in the
cabinet.

NOTE

The transmission equipment is preferentially installed outside the cabinet. If the transmission equipment
needs to be installed in the cabinet, it must meet the following requirements:
l The transmission equipment must be able to work properly at a temperature of 55°C (131°F) or
higher.
l The transmission equipment is supplied with power by external power equipment because the
DCDU-12A cannot provide power for the transmission equipment.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11

Interior of the IMS06

The following figure shows the interior of the IMS06.

Figure 2-4 IMS06 configurations

The following table describes the configurations in an IMS06.

Table 2-2 IMS06 configurations

No. Module/ Option Maxim Description

Board al/ um
Mandat Quantit
ory y
Config
ured in
a
Single
Subrac
k

1 Filler panel Optional 3 Filler panels must be installed in vacant slots

in an EPU05A-02 subrack.

2 PMU 11A Mandato 1 A power monitoring unit 11A (PMU11A)

ry manages the power system and battery,
monitors power distribution, and reports
alarms.

3 PSU Mandato 5 A power supply unit (PSU) (R4850G2)

(R4850G2) ry converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into
-48 V DC.

4 EPU05A-02 Mandato 1 An EPU05A-02 subrack is used in separated

subrack ry macro base stations with 110 V AC or 220 V
AC power inputs. It distributes the DC power.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12

2.3 Application Scenarios of the BTS3900L Cabinet

2.3.1 Application Scenario of the BTS3900L Configured with RFUs

but Without RRUs
This section describes the configurations of the single-, dual-, and triple-mode base stations
when the BTS3900L cabinet is configured with RFUs but without RRUs.

Principles for Configuring the Cabinet

l A maximum of 12 RFUs can be configured in a single site. An additional site is required
is number of RFU exceeds twelve.
l The BTS3900L cabinet support neither side-by-side nor stack installation.
l In a single-mode or dual-mode scenario, only one BBU is configured and it is configured
in the upper part of the cabinet by default.
l In a triple-mode scenario, two BBUs are configured.

Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-mode Base Station

Figure 2-5 shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode BTS3900L.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13

Figure 2-5 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode BTS3900L

(1) BTS3900L DC cabinet (2) BTS3900L AC cabinet

Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-mode Base Station

Figure 2-6 shows the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode BTS3900L.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 14

Figure 2-6 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode BTS3900L

(1) BTS3900L DC cabinet (2) BTS3900L AC cabinet

2.3.2 Application Scenario of the BTS3900L Configured with Both

RFUs and RRUs
This section describes the configurations of the single-, dual-, and triple-mode base stations
when the BTS3900L cabinet is configured with both RFUs and RRUs.

Principles for Configuring the Cabinet

l A BTS3900L base station supports a maximum of 12 RFUs and 9 RRUs. If there are more
than 12 RFUs and 9 RRUs, one or more base stations need to be added. A DCDU-12B is
installed inside the cabinet to distribute power to RRUs.
l The BTS3900L cabinet support neither side-by-side nor stack installation.
l In a single- or dual-mode scenario, BTS3900L is configured with only one BBU and
supports 12 RFUs and 6 RRUs.
l In a triple-mode scenario, BTS3900L is configured with two BBUs and supports 12 RFUs
and 9 RRUs.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15

l When both the RFU and RRU support the GSM mode, the BBU3900 must be configured
with a GTMUb. In addition, the RFUs supporting the GSM mode are connected to the
GTMUb, and the RRUs supporting the GSM mode are connected to the UBRI.

Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-mode Base Station

Figure 2-7 shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode BTS3900L.

Figure 2-7 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode BTS3900L

Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-mode Base Station

Figure 2-8 shows the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode BTS3900L.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16

Figure 2-8 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode BTS3900L

2.4 BTS3900L Engineering Specifications

The BTS3900L engineering specifications include input power specifications, equipment
specifications, and environment specifications of the BTS3900L cabinets and IMS06 subrack.

Input Power Specifications

The BTS3900L DC cabinet supports -48 V DC power input only. The BTS3900L AC cabinet
supports AC power input. Table 2-3 lists the input power specifications of the AC and DC
cabinets.

Table 2-3 Input power specifications of BTS3900L cabinets

Type Power Input Voltage Range

BTS3900L DC cabinet -48 V DC -38.4 V DC to -57 V DC

BTS3900L AC cabinet 220 V AC single-phase 176 V AC to 290 V AC

200/346 V AC to 240/415 V 176/304 V AC to 290/500 V

AC three-phase AC

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17

An IMS06 can be supplied with different AC input power. Power equipment in the cabinet
converts AC power into -48 V DC power for the base station. The following table lists the AC
input power specifications of an IMS06.

Table 2-4 Input power specifications of an IMS06

Power Supply Rated Voltage Operating Voltage

220 V AC single- 200 V AC to 240 V AC 176 V AC to 290 V AC

phase

220 V AC three- l Line to neutral voltage: 200 V l Line to neutral voltage: 176 V
phase AC to 240 V AC AC to 290 V AC
l Phase-to-phase voltage: 346 V l Phase-to-phase voltage: 304 V
AC to 415 V AC AC to 500 V AC

Equipment Specifications
Table 2-5 lists the equipment specifications of BTS3900L cabinets.

Table 2-5 Equipment specifications of BTS3900L cabinets

Type Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight

BTS3900L DC cabinet 1600 mm x 600 mm x 450 ≤ 235 kg (518.18 lb) (full

mm (62.99 in. x 23.62 in. x configuration, with two
17.72 in.) BBUs and twelve RFUs, and
Base: 40 mm x 600 mm x 420 without transmission
mm (1.57 in. x 23.62 in. x devices)
16.54 in.)

BTS3900L AC cabinet 1950 mm x 600 mm x 450 ≤ 280 kg (617.4 lb) (full

mm (76.77 in. x 23.62 in. x configuration, with two
17.72 in.) BBUs, twelve RFUs, and AC
Base: 40 mm x 600 mm x 420 power device, and without
mm (1.57 in. x 23.62 in. x transmission devices)
16.54 in.)

NOTE
For details about other engineering specifications of the BTS3900L cabinet, see 3900 Series Base Station
Technical Description.

The following table lists the equipment specifications of an IMS06.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 18

Table 2-6 Equipment specifications of an IMS06

Item Specifications

Dimensions (H x W x 350 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (13.78 in. x 23.62 in. x 17.72 in.)
D)

Weight ≤ 21 kg (empty subrack)

Environment Specifications
The following table lists the environment specifications of the BTS3900L.

Table 2-7 Environment specifications a BTS3900 cabinet

Item Specifications

Noise Meeting the ETS 300 753 3.1 standard

The following table lists the environmental specifications of an IMS06.

Table 2-8 Environmental specifications of an IMS06

Item Specifications

Noise Meeting the ETS 300 753 3.1 standard

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 19

3 BTS3900L Modules

About This Chapter

A BTS3900L cabinet consists of the following modules: RFU, BBU3900, DCDU-12, fan
assembly, ELU, and optional modules.

3.1 RFU
The radio frequency unit (RFU) performs the following functions: modulation and demodulation
of baseband signals and RF signals, data processing, as well as signal combination and division.
The RFUs are divided into different types according to their working standards.

3.2 RRU
The Radio Remote Unit (RRU) converts and forwards signals between the BBU and the antenna
system.

3.3 BBU3900
This section presents the exterior of the BBU3900 and describes the boards in the BBU3900 and
their panels, functions, indicators, ports, and engineering specifications.

3.4 GATM
The GSM Antenna and TMA control Module (GATM) controls the antenna and TMA.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 20

3.1.1 DRFU
Double radio frequency unit (DRFU) is an RF unit of GSM radio filter and applies to GSM only
scenario.

Panel
Figure 3-1 shows the DRFU panel.

Figure 3-1 DRFU panel

Function
The DRFU performs modulation, demodulation, data processing, and combining and dividing
for baseband signals and radio frequency (RF) signals.

In addition, the DRFU provides the following functions:

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 21

l Converts the direct frequency conversion technology, modulates the baseband signals for
the GSM TX band. After filtering and amplification, the baseband signals are transmitted
to the antenna system through the duplexer.
l Receives uplink RF signals from the antenna system and then down-converts the received
signals to intermediate frequency (IF) signals. After amplification, analog-to-digital
conversion, digital down-conversion, matched filtering, automatic gain control (AGC), the
IF signals are sent to a baseband unit (BBU) for further processing.
l Performs power control.
l Performs reverse power detection.
l Synthesizes frequencies and tests loops.
l Generates the common public radio interface (CPRI) clock, recovers the CPRI clock from
loss of synchronization, and detects alarms.

A DRFU consists of a high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier, and
dual-duplexer. Figure 3-2 shows the logical structure of the DRFU.

Figure 3-2 Logical structure of the DRFU

Indicators
There are six indicators on the DRFU panel, indicating its operating status. Table 3-1 describes
the status of the indicators on the DRFU.

Table 3-1 Status of the Indicators on the DRFU

Indicator Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is power supply, but the module

breaks down or is verifying the
software version.

Blinking (on for 1s and The module works properly.

off for 1s)

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 22

Indicator Color Status Description

Blinking (on for 0.125s The module is loading software.

and off for 0.125s)

Off There is no power supply, or the module

breaks down.

ALM Red Steady on Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are

generated, and the module must be
replaced.

Blinking (on for 1s and Alarms are generated. The alarms may
off for 1s) be caused by the faults on the related
boards or ports. Therefore, the
necessity for module replacement is
uncertain.

Off No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) is

generated.

ACT Green Steady on The module works properly with the

TX channel enabled.

Blinking (on for 1s and The module works properly with the
off for 1s) TX channel disabled.

VSWR Red Steady on The VSWR alarm is generated on the

ANT1 port.

Blinking (on for 1s and The VSWR alarm is generated on the

off for 1s) ANT2 port.

Blinking (on for 0.125s The VSWR alarm is generated on the

and off for 0.125s) ANT1 and ANT2 ports.

Off No VSWR alarm is generated.

CPRI0 Red and Steady green The CPRI link is available.

green
Steady red The reception of the optical module is
abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
and off for 1s)

Off The small form-factor pluggable (SFP)

module is not properly installed, or the
optical module is powered off.

CPRI1 Red and Steady green The CPRI link is available.

green
Steady red The reception of the optical module is
abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 23

Indicator Color Status Description

Blinking red (on for 1s The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
and off for 1s)

Off The SFP module is not properly

installed, or the optical module is
powered off.

Ports
Table 3-2 describes the ports on the DRFU.

Table 3-2 Ports on the DRFU

Port Type Silkscreen on Connector Description

the Port Type

Port for ANT1 DIN female Connects to the antenna system.

transceiving connector
RF signals ANT2

CPRI port CPRI0 SFP female Connects to a lower-level radio

connector frequency unit (RFU) during the
cascading.

CPRI1 Connects to the BBU, or an upper-level

RFU in the cascading mode.

Interconnecti RX1/IN QMA female Receives the diversity signals in

on port for connector antenna channel 1.
receiving RF
signals RX1/OUT Transmits the diversity signals in
antenna channel 1.

RX2/IN Receives the diversity signals in

antenna channel 2.

RX2/OUT Transmits the diversity signals in

antenna channel 2.

Power PWR 3V3 power Feeds in power.

supply port connector

Technical Specifications
This section describes the technical specifications of the DRFU, which include supported modes
and frequency Bands, RF Specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna capability.

For the technical specifications of DRFU, see section “DRFU Technical Specifications” in the
3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 24

3.1.2 GRFU
GSM radio frequency unit (GRFU) is an RF unit of GSM radio filter and applies to GSM only
scenario.

Panel
GRFUs fall into three types: GRFU V1, GRFU V2, and GRFU V2a. The three types of GRFUs
can be identified by their labels. As shown in Figure 3-3, there is "V0" or "V1" on the label of
a GRFU V1, there is "V2" on the label of a GRFU V2, and there is "V2a" on the label of a GRFU
V2a.

Figure 3-3 GRFU panel

Function
A GRFU performs modulation and demodulation between baseband signals and radio frequency
(RF) signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals.

In addition,the GRFU has the following functions:

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 25

conversion, digital down-conversion, matched filtering, automatic gain control (AGC), the
IF signals are sent to the baseband unit (BBU) for further processing.
l Provides power control and VSWR detection.
l Supplies power to the tower mounted amplifier (TMA) and controls the remote electrical
tilt (RET) antenna.
l Performs reverse power detection.
l Synthesizes frequencies and tests loops.
l Generates the common public radio interface (CPRI) clock, recovers the CPRI clock from
loss of synchronization, and detects alarms.

Principles
A GRFU consists of a high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier, and
dual-duplexer. Figure 3-4 shows the logical structure of the GRFU.

Figure 3-4 Logical structure of the GRFU

Indicators
The six indicators on the GRFU panel indicate the operating status of the GRFU. Table 3-3
describes the indicators on the GRFU panel.

Table 3-3 Indicators on the GRFU Panel

Indicato Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is power supply, but the module

breaks down or is verifying the software
version.

Blinking (on for 1s and The module works properly.

off for 1s)

Blinking (on for 0.125s The module is loading software.

and off for 0.125s)

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 26

Indicato Color Status Description

Off There is no power supply, or the module

breaks down.

ALM Red Steady on Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are

generated, and the module must be
replaced.

Blinking (on for 1s and Alarms are generated. The alarms may
off for 1s) be caused by the faults on the related
boards or ports. Therefore, the necessity
for module replacement is uncertain.

Off No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) is

generated.

ACT Green Steady on The module works properly with the TX

channel enabled.

Blinking (on for 1s and The module works properly with the TX
off for 1s) channel disabled.

VSWR Red Steady on The VSWR alarm is generated on the

ANT_TX/RXA port.

Off No VSWR alarm is generated.

CPRI0 Red and Steady green The CPRI link is available.

green
Steady red The reception of the optical module is
abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
and off for 1s)

Off The small form-factor pluggable (SFP)

module is not properly installed, or the
optical module is powered off.

CPRI1 Red and Steady green The CPRI link is available.

green
Steady red The reception of the optical module is
abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
and off for 1s)

Off The SFP module is not properly

installed, or the optical module is
powered off.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 27

Ports
Table 3-4 describes the ports on the GRFU panel.

Table 3-4 Ports on the GRFU Panel

Port Type Silkscree Connector Description

n Type

RF port ANT_RX DIN Connects to the antenna system

B connector

ANT_TX/ DIN Connects to the antenna system

RXA connector

CPRI port CPRI0 SFP female Connects to the BBU, or an upper-level RFU
connector in the cascading mode

CPRI1 SFP female Connects to a lower-level RFU during the

connector cascading

Interconnectio RX_INB QMA female Receives the diversity signals

n port for connector
receiving RF
signals RX_OUT QMA female Transmits the main signals
A connector

Power supply PWR 3V3 power Feeds in power

port connector

Monitoring MON RJ45 Port for monitoring and commissioning

port connector

Technical Specifications
This section describes the technical specifications of the GRFU, which include supported modes
and frequency bands, RF specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna capability.

For the technical specifications of GRFU, see section “GRFU Technical Specifications” in the
3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.

3.1.3 WRFU
WCDMA Radio Frequency (WRFU) is an RF unit of WCDMA radio filter and applies to UMTS
only scenario.

Panel
Figure 3-5 shows the panel of the WRFU.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 28

Figure 3-5 Panel of the WRFU

Functions
The functions of the WRFU are as follows:

l Implements the direct frequency conversion technique in the transmit channel. The
baseband signals are modulated to WCDMA RF signals. After being filtered and amplified
or being combined, the RF signals are transmitted through the duplex filter to the antenna
for radio transmission.
l Receives UL RF signals from the antenna system and then down-converts the received
signals to IF signals. After amplification, analog-to-digital conversion, digital down-
conversion, matched filtering, automatic gain control (AGC), the IF signals are sent to the
BBU for further processing.
l Implements power control and Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) detection
l Provides reverse power detection
l Supplies power to the tower mounted amplifier (TMA) and controls the remote electrical
tilt (RET) antenna.
l Provides frequency synthesis and loopback test
l Generates the CPRI clock, recovers the CPRI clock from loss of synchronization, and
detects alarms
l Supports 40 W (2 carriers) and 80 W (4 carriers) power outputs

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 29

Principle
The WRFU consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier,
and duplex unit. Figure 3-6 shows the principle of the WRFU.

Figure 3-6 Principle of the WRFU

LEDs
Table 3-5 describes the LEDs on the WRFU panel.

Table 3-5 LEDs on the WRFU panel

Label Color State Description

RUN Green ON There is power supply, but the module

breaks down or is verifying the
software version.

OFF The module works properly.

Blinking (on for 1s and The module is loading software.

off for 1s)

Blinking (on for 0.125s There is no power supply, or the

and off for 0.125s) module breaks down.

ALM Red ON Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are

generated, and the module must be
replaced.

Blinking (on for 1s and Alarms are generated. The alarms may
off for 1s) be caused by the faults on the related
boards or ports. Therefore, the
necessity for module replacement is
uncertain.

OFF No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) is

generated.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 30

Label Color State Description

ACT Green ON The module works properly with the

TX channel enabled.

Blinking (on for 1s and The module works properly with the
off for 1s) TX channel disabled.

VSWR Red ON (red) VSWR-related alarms are generated

on the ANT_TX/RXA port.

OFF (red) No VSWR alarm is generated.

CPRI0 Red/Green On (green) The CPRI links are normal.

On (red) The reception of the optical module is

abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
and off for 1s)

OFF The SFP is out of position, or the

optical module is powered off.

CPRI1 Red/Green On (green) The CPRI links are normal.

On (red) The reception of the optical module is

abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
and off for 1s)

OFF The SFP is out of position, or the

optical module is powered off.

Ports
Table 3-6 describes the ports on the WRFU panel.

Table 3-6 Ports on the WRFU panel

Port Label Connector Description

RF port ANT_RXB DIN RF RX port for connecting to the antenna

connector system

ANT_TX/ DIN RF TX/RX port for connecting to the

RXA connector antenna system

CPRI CPRI0 SFP female Connected to the BBU, or the upper-level

connector WRFU during the cascading

CPRI1 SFP female Connected to the lower-level WRFU

connector during the cascading

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 31

Port Label Connector Description

Interconnectio RX_INB QMA female Receives the diversity signals.

n port for RF connector
RX signals
RX_OUTA QMA female Transmits the main signals.
connector

Power supply PWR 3V3 power Feeding power

socket connector

Monitoring MON RJ45 Port for monitoring and commissioning

port connector

Technical Specifications
This section describes the technical specifications of the WRFU, which include supported modes
and frequency bands, RF specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna capability.

For the technical specifications of WRFU, see section “WRFU Technical Specifications” in the
3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.

3.1.4 WRFUa Description

This section describes WRFUa hardware, including panels, functions, principles, indicators, and
ports.

Panel
The following figure shows the WRFUa panel.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 32

Figure 3-7 WRFUa panel

Principle
A WRFUa consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier, and
duplexer. The following figure shows the logic structure of a WRFUa.

Figure 3-8 Logic structure of a WRFUa

Function
A WRFUa performs the following functions:

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 33

l Performs digital up-convert on intermediate frequency (IF) signals on the transmitting

channel, and modulates baseband signals to RF signals. After being filtered and amplified,
the RF signals are sent by the duplex filter to the antenna.
l Receives RF signals from the antenna system and then down-converts the received signals
to IF signals. After being amplified, analog-to-digital converted, digital down-converted,
matched filtered, and digital automatic gain control (DAGC) processed, the IF signals are
sent to the BBU for further processing.
l Controls power.
l Tests the VSWR.
l Manages the TMA power feeding and RET antennas.
l Controls the DPD feedback. That is, a WRFUa takes samples of output signals, analyzes
the samples, and performs linear control on transmit signals based on the analysis.
l Generates the CPRI clock, recovers the CPRI clock from out-of-synchronization, and
detects alarms.

Indicator
Table 3-7 describes the indicators on the WRFUa panel.

Table 3-7 Indicators on the WRFUa panel

Indicato Color State Meaning

RUN Green Steady on There is power supply, but the module

is faulty or the version is being checked.

Blinking (on for 1s and The module is working.

off for 1s)

Blinking (on for 0.125s The module is loading software.

and off for 0.125s)

Steady off There is no power supply or the module

is faulty.

ALM Red Steady on Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are

generated and the module needs to be
replaced.

Blinking (on for 1s and Alarms are generated. The alarms may
off for 1s) be caused by the faults on the related
boards or ports. Therefore, you need to
locate the fault before deciding whether
to replace the module.

Steady off No alarm (excluding the VSWR alarm)

is generated.

ACT Green Steady on The module is functioning properly

with TX channels enabled.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 34

Indicato Color State Meaning

Blinking (on for 1s and The module is functioning properly

off for 1s) with TX channels disabled.

VSWR Red Steady on A VSWR alarm is generated on the

ANT_TX/RXA port.

Blinking (on for 1s and A VSWR alarm is generated on the

off for 1s) ANT_RXB port.

Blinking (on for 0.125s VSWR alarms are generated on the

and off for 0.125s) ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_RXB ports.

Steady off No VSWR alarm is generated.

CPRI0 Red or Steady green The CPRI link is functioning properly.

green
Steady red The optical module fails to receive
signals.

Blinking red (on for 1s The CPRI link is out of lock.

and off for 1s)

Steady off The SFP module is not properly

installed, or the optical module is
powered off.

CPRI1 Red or Steady green The CPRI link is functioning properly.

green
Steady red The optical module fails to receive
signals.

Blinking red (on for 1s The CPRI link is out of lock.

and off for 1s)

Steady off The SFP module is not properly

installed, or the optical module is
powered off.

Port
Table 3-8 describes the ports on the WRFUa panel.

Table 3-8 Ports on the WRFUa panel

Port Type Silkscreen Connector Description

RF port ANT_RXB DIN Connects to the antenna system for

connector receiving signals.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 35

Port Type Silkscreen Connector Description

ANT_TX/ DIN Connects to the antenna system for

RXA connector transiting and receiving signals.

CPRI port CPRI0 SFP female Connects to the BBU or connects to the
connector cascaded upper-level WRFUa.

CPRI1 SFP female Connects to the cascaded lower-level

connector WRFUa.

Interconnectio RX_INB QMA female Receives diversity signals.

n port for connector
receiving RF
signals RX_OUTA QMA female Transmits main signals.
connector

Power port PWR 3V3 Connects the power equipment.

connector

Monitoring MON RJ45 Performs monitoring and commissioning.

port connector

Technical Specifications
This section describes the technical specifications of the WRFUa, which include supported
modes and frequency bands, RF specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna
capability.

For the technical specifications of WRFUa, see section “WRFUa Technical Specifications” in
the 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.

3.1.5 WRFUd
WCDMA Radio Frequency Unit Type D (WRFUd) is an RF unit of WCDMA radio filter and
applies to UMTS only scenario.

Panel
Figure 3-9 shows a WRFUd panel.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 36

Figure 3-9 WRFUd panel

Functions
The functions of the WRFUd are as follows:

l Implements the direct frequency conversion technique in the TX channel. The baseband
signals are modulated to WCDMA RF signals. After being filtered and amplified or being
combined, the RF signals are transmitted through the duplex filter to the antenna for radio
transmission.
l Receives uplink RF signals from the antenna system and then down-converts the received
signals to intermediate frequency (IF) signals. After amplification, analog-to-digital
conversion, digital down-conversion, matched filtering, automatic gain control (AGC), the
IF signals are sent to the BBU for further processing.
l Implements power control and Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) detection.
l Supplies power to the tower mounted amplifier (TMA) and controls the remote electrical
tilt (RET) antenna.
l Performs reverse power detection.
l Synthesizes frequencies and loop tests.
l Generates the CPRI clock, recovers the CPRI clock from loss of synchronization, and
detects alarms.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 37

Principle
The WRFUd consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier
(PA), and duplexer. Figure 3-10 shows the logical structure of the WRFUd.

Figure 3-10 Logical structure of the WRFUd

LEDs
Table 3-9 describes the LEDs on the WRFUd panel.

Table 3-9 LEDs on the WRFUd panel

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green On There is power supply, but the module

breaks down or is verifying the software
version.

Blinking (on for 1s and The module works properly.

off for 1s)

Off The module is loading software.

Blinking (on for 0.125s There is no power supply, or the module

and off for 0.125s) breaks down.

ALM Red On Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are

generated, and the module must be
replaced.

Blinking (on for 1s and Alarms are generated. The alarms may
off for 1s) be caused by the faults on the related
boards or ports. Therefore, the necessity
for module replacement is uncertain.

Off No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) is

generated.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 38

LED Color Status Description

ACT Green On The module works properly with the TX

channel enabled.

Blinking (on for 1s and The module works properly with the TX
off for 1s) channel disabled.

VSWR Red On VSWR-related alarms are generated on

the ANT_TX/RXA port.

Blinking (on for 1s and VSWR-related alarms are generated on

off for 1s) the ANT_TX/RXB port.

Blinking (on for 0.125s VSWR-related alarms are generated on

and off for 0.125s) both the ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_TX/
RXB ports.

Off No VSWR-related alarm is generated.

CPRI0 Red and On (green) The CPRI link is available.

green
On (red) The reception of the optical module is
abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
and off for 1s)

Off The SFP module is not properly

installed, or the optical module is
powered off.

CPRI1 Red and On (green) The CPRI link is available.

green
On (red) The reception of the optical module is
abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
and off for 1s)

Off The SFP module is not properly

installed, or the optical module is
powered off.

Ports
Table 3-10 describes the ports on the WRFUd panel.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 39

Table 3-10 Ports on the WRFUd panel

Port Label Connector Description

RF port ANT_TX/ DIN RF TX/RX port for connecting to the

RXB connector antenna system

ANT_TX/ DIN
RXA connector

CPRI port CPRI0 SFP female Port for connecting to the BBU, or the
connector upper-level WRFUd during the cascading

CPRI1 SFP female Port for connecting to the lower-level

connector WRFUd during the cascading

Interconnectio RX_INB QMA female Input port of diversity signals in the

n port for connector antenna channel
receiving RF
signals RX_OUTA QMA female Output port of diversity signals in the
connector antenna channel

Power supply PWR 3V3 power Socket for feeding power

socket connector

Monitoring MON RJ45 Port for monitoring and commissioning

port connector

Technical Specifications
This section describes the technical specifications of the WRFUd, which include supported
modes and frequency Bands, RF Specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna
capability.

For the technical specifications of MRFUd, see section “MRFUd Technical Specifications” in
the 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.

3.1.6 WRFUe
WCDMA Radio Frequency Unit Type E (WRFUe) is an RF unit of WCDMA radio filter and
applies to UMTS only scenario.

Panel
Figure 3-11 shows a WRFUe panel.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 40

Figure 3-11 WRFUe panel

Functions
The functions of the WRFUe are as follows:

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 41

Principle
The WRFUe consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier
(PA), and duplexer. Figure 3-12 shows the logical structure of the WRFUe.

Figure 3-12 Logical structure of the WRFUe

LEDs
Table 3-11 describes the LEDs on the WRFUe panel.

Table 3-11 LEDs on the WRFUe panel

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green On There is power supply, but the module

breaks down or is verifying the software
version.

Blinking (on for 1s and The module works properly.

off for 1s)

Off The module is loading software.

Blinking (on for 0.125s There is no power supply, or the module

and off for 0.125s) breaks down.

ALM Red On Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are

generated, and the module must be
replaced.

Blinking (on for 1s and Alarms are generated. The alarms may
off for 1s) be caused by the faults on the related
boards or ports. Therefore, the necessity
for module replacement is uncertain.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 42

LED Color Status Description

Off No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) is

generated.

ACT Green On The module works properly with the TX

channel enabled.

Blinking (on for 1s and The module works properly with the TX
off for 1s) channel disabled.

VSWR Red On VSWR-related alarms are generated on

the ANT_TX/RXA port.

Blinking (on for 1s and VSWR-related alarms are generated on

off for 1s) the ANT_TX/RXB port.

Blinking (on for 0.125s VSWR-related alarms are generated on

and off for 0.125s) both the ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_TX/
RXB ports.

Off No VSWR-related alarm is generated.

CPRI0 Red and On (green) The CPRI link is available.

green
On (red) The reception of the optical module is
abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
and off for 1s)

Off The SFP module is not properly

installed, or the optical module is
powered off.

CPRI1 Red and On (green) The CPRI link is available.

green
On (red) The reception of the optical module is
abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
and off for 1s)

Off The SFP module is not properly

installed, or the optical module is
powered off.

Ports
Table 3-12 describes the ports on the WRFUe panel.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 43

Table 3-12 Ports on the WRFUe panel

Port Label Connector Description

RF port ANT_TX/ DIN RF TX/RX port for connecting to the

RXB connector antenna system

ANT_TX/ DIN
RXA connector

CPRI port CPRI0 SFP female Port for connecting to the BBU, or the
connector upper-level WRFUe during the cascading

CPRI1 SFP female Port for connecting to the lower-level

connector WRFUe during the cascading

Interconnectio RX_INB QMA female Input port of diversity signals in the

n port for connector antenna channel
receiving RF
signals RX_OUTA QMA female Output port of diversity signals in the
connector antenna channel

Power supply PWR 3V3 power Socket for feeding power

socket connector

Monitoring MON RJ45 Port for monitoring and commissioning

port connector

Technical Specifications
This section describes the technical specifications of the WRFUe, which include supported
modes and frequency bands, RF specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna
capability.

For the technical specifications of WRFUe, see section “WRFUe Technical Specifications” in
the 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.

3.1.7 MRFU
Multi-Mode Radio Frequency Unit (MRFU) is a type of RF unit that can work in multiple radio
frequencies. It applies to scenarios such as GO, UO, LO, GU and GL.

Panel
MRFUs fall into three types: MRFU V1, MRFU V2, and MRFU V2a. The three types of MRFUs
can be identified by their labels. As shown in Figure 3-13, there is "V0" or "V1" on the label of
a MRFU V1, there is "V2" on the label of a MRFU V2, and there is "V2a" on the label of a
MRFU V2a.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 44

Figure 3-13 MRFU Panel

Function
The functions of MRFU are as follows:
l Modulates and converts the signals to the TX band by up-converting the intermediate
frequency (IF) signals, filters and amplifies the signals and then transmits the signals to the
antenna through the duplexer.
l Receives radio frequency (RF) signals from the antenna system, down-converts the signals
to IF signals, and then transmits them to the baseband unit (BBU) after an amplification,
analog-to-digital conversion, digital down-conversion, matched filtering, and Digital
Automatic Gain Control (DAGC).
l Performs power control.
l Provides Voltage Standing Wave Ration (VSWR) detection.
l Supplies power to the tower mounted amplifier (TMA) and controls the remote electrical
tilt (RET) antenna.
l Controls Digital Predistortion (DPD) based on feedback signals.
l Generates the common public radio interface (CPRI) clock, recovers the CPRI clock from
loss of synchronization, and detects alarms.

Principles
A MRFU consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier, and
duplexer. Figure 3-14 shows the principle of the MRFU.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 45

Figure 3-14 Principle of the MRFU

Indicators
Table 3-13 describes the indicators on the MRFU.

Table 3-13 Indicators on the MRFU

Indicato Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is power supply, but the module

breaks down or is verifying the software
version.

Blinking (on for 1s and The module works properly.

off for 1s)

Blinking (on for 0.125s The module is loading software.

and off for 0.125s)

Off There is no power supply, or the module

breaks down.

ALM Red Steady on Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are

generated, and the module must be
replaced.

Blinking (on for 1s and Alarms are generated. The alarms may
off for 1s) be caused by the faults on the related
boards or ports. Therefore, the necessity
for module replacement is uncertain.

Off No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) is

generated.

ACT Green Steady on The MRFU works properly with the TX

channel enabled.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 46

Indicato Color Status Description

Blinking (on for 1s and The MRFU works properly with the TX
off for 1s) channel disabled.

VSWR Red Steady on The VSWR alarm is generated on the

ANT_TX/RXA port.

Off No VSWR alarm is generated.

CPRI0 Red and Steady green The CPRI link is available.

green
Steady red The optical module fails to receive
signals.

Blinking red (on for 1s The reception of the optical module is

and off for 1s) abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Off The small form-factor pluggable (SFP)

module is not properly installed, or the
optical module is powered off.

CPRI1 Red and Steady green The CPRI link is available.

green
Steady red The reception of the optical module is
abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
and off for 1s)

Off The SFP module is not properly

installed, or the optical module is
powered off.

Ports
Table 3-14 describes the ports on the MRFU.

Table 3-14 Port on the MRFU

Port Type Silkscreen Connector Description

Type

RF port ANT_RXB DIN RF RX port for connecting to the antenna

connector system

ANT_TX/ DIN RF TX/RX port for connecting to the

RXA connector antenna system

CPRI port CPRI0 SFP female Connects to the BBU

connector

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 47

Port Type Silkscreen Connector Description

Type

CPRI1 SFP female Connects to the BBU

connector

Interconnectio RX_INB QMA female Receives the diversity signals

n port for connector
receiving RF
signals RX_OUTA QMA female Transmits the main signals
connector

Power supply PWR 3V3 power Feeding -48 V DC power

port connector

Monitoring MON RJ45 Port for monitoring and commissioning

port connector

Technical Specifications
This section describes the technical specifications of the MRFU, which include supported modes
and frequency bands, RF specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna capability.

For the technical specifications of MRFU, see section “MRFU Technical Specifications” in the
3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.

3.1.8 MRFUd
Multi-Mode Radio Frequency Unit Type D (MRFUd) is a type of RF unit that can work in
multiple radio frequencies. It applies to scenarios such as GO, UO, LO, GU and GL.

Panel
Figure 3-15 shows a MRFUd panel.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 48

Figure 3-15 MRFUd panel

Functions
The functions of the MRFUd are as follows:

l Modulates and converts the signals to the TX band by up-converting the intermediate
frequency (IF) signals, filters and amplifies the signals or combines the signals, and then
transmits the signals to the antenna through the duplexer.
l Receives RF signals from the antenna system, down-converts the signals to IF signals, and
performs amplification, analog-to-digital conversion, digital down-conversion, matched
filtering, and digital automatic gain control (DAGC), and then transmits the signals to the
BBU for further processing.
l Performs power control.
l Provides Voltage Standing Wave Ration (VSWR) detection.
l Supplies power to the TMA and controls the RET antenna.
l Controls Digital Predistortion (DPD) based on feedback signals.
l Generates the CPRI clock, recovers the CPRI clock from loss of synchronization, and
detects alarms.

Principle
The MRFUd consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier
(PA), and duplexer. Figure 3-16 shows the logical structure of the MRFUd.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 49

Figure 3-16 Logical structure of the MRFUd

LEDs
Table 3-15 describes the LEDs on the MRFUd panel.

Table 3-15 LEDs on the MRFUd panel

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green On There is power supply, but the module

breaks down or is verifying the software
version.

Blinking (on for 1s and off The module works properly.

for 1s)

Blinking (on for 0.125s The module is loading software.

and off for 0.125s)

Off There is no power supply, or the module

breaks down.

ALM Red On Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are

generated, and the module must be
replaced.

Blinking (on for 1s and off Alarms are generated. The alarms may be
for 1s) caused by the faults on the related boards
or ports. Therefore, the necessity for
module replacement is uncertain.

Off No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) is

generated.

ACT Green On The module works properly with the TX

channel enabled.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 50

LED Color Status Description

Blinking (on for 1s and off The module works properly with the TX
for 1s) channel disabled.

VSW Red On VSWR-related alarms are generated on the

R ANT_TX/RXA port.

Blinking (on for 1s and off VSWR-related alarms are generated on the
for 1s) ANT_TX/RXB port.

Blinking (on for 0.125s VSWR-related alarms are generated on

and off for 0.125s) both the ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_TX/
RXB ports.

Off No VSWR-related alarm is generated.

CPRI Red and On (green) The CPRI link is available.

0 green
On (red) The reception of the optical module is
abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s and The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
off for 1s)

Off The SFP module is not properly installed,

or the optical module is powered off.

CPRI Red and On (green) The CPRI link is available.

1 green
On (red) The reception of the optical module is
abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s and The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
off for 1s)

Off The SFP module is not properly installed,

or the optical module is powered off.

Ports
Table 3-16 describes the ports on the MRFUd panel.

Table 3-16 Ports on the MRFUd panel

Port Label Connector Description

RF port ANT_TX/ DIN RF TX/RX port for connecting to the

RXB connector antenna system

ANT_TX/ DIN
RXA connector

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 51

Port Label Connector Description

CPRI port CPRI0 SFP female Port for connecting to the BBU
connector

CPRI1 SFP female Port for connecting to the BBU

connector

Interconnectio RX_INB QMA female Input port for diversity RX

n port for connector
receiving RF
signals RX_OUTA QMA female Output port for main RX
connector

Power supply PWR 3V3 power Socket for feeding -48 V DC power
socket connector

Monitoring MON RJ45 Port for monitoring and commissioning

port connector

Technical Specifications
This section describes the technical specifications of the MRFUd, which include supported
modes and frequency bands, RF specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna
capability.

For the technical specifications of MRFUd, see section “MRFUd Technical Specifications” in
the 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.

3.1.9 MRFUe
Multi-Mode Radio Frequency Unit Type E (MRFUe) is a type of RF unit that can work in
multiple radio frequencies. It applies to scenarios such as GO, UO, LO, GU and GL.

Panel
Figure 3-17 shows a MRFUe panel.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 52

Figure 3-17 MRFUe panel

Functions
The functions of the MRFUe are as follows:

Principle
The MRFUe consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier
(PA), and duplexer. Figure 3-18 shows the logical structure of the MRFUe.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 53

Figure 3-18 Logical structure of the MRFUe

LEDs
Table 3-17 describes the LEDs on the MRFUe panel.

Table 3-17 LEDs on the MRFUe panel

LE Color Status Description

RU Green On There is power supply, but the module breaks

N down or is verifying the software version.

Blinking (on for 1s and off The module works properly.

for 1s)

Blinking (on for 0.125s and The module is loading software.

off for 0.125s)

Off There is no power supply, or the module

breaks down.

AL Red On Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are

M generated, and the module must be replaced.

Blinking (on for 1s and off Alarms are generated. The alarms may be
for 1s) caused by the faults on the related boards or
ports. Therefore, the necessity for module
replacement is uncertain.

Off No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) is

generated.

ACT Green On The module works properly with the TX

channel enabled.

Blinking (on for 1s and off The module works properly with the TX
for 1s) channel disabled.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 54

LE Color Status Description

VS Red On VSWR-related alarms are generated on the

WR ANT_TX/RXA port.

Off No VSWR-related alarm is generated.

CPR Red On (green) The CPRI link is available.

I0 and
green On (red) The reception of the optical module is
abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s and The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
off for 1s)

Off The SFP module is not properly installed, or

the optical module is powered off.

CPR Red On (green) The CPRI link is available.

I1 and
green On (red) The reception of the optical module is
abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s and The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
off for 1s)

Off The SFP module is not properly installed, or

the optical module is powered off.

Ports
Table 3-18 describes the ports on the MRFUe panel.

Table 3-18 Ports on the MRFUe panel

Port Label Connector Description

RF port ANT/ DIN connector RF RX port for connecting to the antenna

RXB system

ANT_T DIN connector RF TX/RX port for connecting to the

X/RXA antenna system

CPRI port CPRI0 SFP female Port for connecting to the BBU
connector

CPRI1 SFP female Port for connecting to the BBU

connector

Interconnection port RX_IN QMA female Input port for diversity RX

for receiving RF B connector
signals

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 55

Port Label Connector Description

RX_OU QMA female Output port for main RX

TA connector

Power supply socket PWR 3V3 power Socket for feeding -48 V DC power
connector

Monitoring port MON RJ45 Port for monitoring and commissioning

connector

Technical Specifications
This section describes the technical specifications of the MRFUe, which include supported
modes and frequency bands, RF Specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna
capability.

For the technical specifications of MRFUe, see section “MRFUe Technical Specifications” in
the 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.

3.1.10 LRFU
LTE Radio Frequency Unit (LRFU) is an RF unit of LTE Frenquency Division Duplex (FDD)
and applies to LTE Only scenario.

Panel
Figure 3-19 shows the panel of the LRFU.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 56

Figure 3-19 Panel of the LRFU

Functions
The LRFU processes uplink and downlink services and controls and monitors internal boards
or modules. Figure 3-20 shows the logical structure of the LRFU.

Figure 3-20 Logical structure of the LRFU

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 57

LEDs
Table 3-19 describes the LEDs on the panel of the LRFU.

Table 3-19 LEDs on the LRFU

Label Color Status Description

RUN Green On There is power supply, but the module

breaks down or is verifying the
software version.

Off The module works properly.

Blinking (on for 1s and The module is loading software.

off for 1s)

Blinking (on for 0.125s There is no power supply, or the

and off for 0.125s) module breaks down.

ALM Red On Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are

generated, and the module must be
replaced.

Blinking (on for 1s and Alarms are generated. The alarms may
off for 1s) be caused by the faults on the related
boards or ports. Therefore, the
necessity for module replacement is
uncertain.

Off No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) is

generated.

ACT Green On The module works properly (TX

channel enabled).

Blinking (on for 1s and The module is running (TX channel

off for 1s) disabled).

VSWR Red On (red) A VSWR-related alarm is generated at

the ANT_TX/RXA port.

Blinking (on for 1s and A VSWR-related alarm is generated at

off for 1s) the ANT_TX/RXB port.

Blinking (on for 0.125s A VSWR-related alarm is generated at

and off for 0.125s) the ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_TX/
RXB ports.

Off (red) No VSWR alarm is generated.

CPRI0 Red/Green On (green) The CPRI links are normal.

On (red) The reception of the optical module is

abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 58

Label Color Status Description

Blinking red (on for 1s The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
and off for 1s)

Off The SFP module is out of position, or

the optical module is powered off.

CPRI1 Red/Green On (green) The CPRI links are normal.

On (red) The reception of the optical module is

abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
and off for 1s)

Off The SFP module is out of position, or

the optical module is powered off.

Port
Table 3-20 describes the ports on the panel of the LRFU.

Table 3-20 Ports on the panel of the LRFU

Port Label Connector Description

RF port ANT_T DIN connector RF TX/RX port for connecting to the antenna
X/RXB system

ANT_T DIN connector

X/RXA

CPRI port CPRI0 SFP female Used for the connection to the BBU. CPRI0
connector port and CPRI1 port work in mutual backup
mode.

CPRI1 SFP female Used for the connection to the BBU. CPRI1
connector port and CPRI0 port work in mutual backup
mode.

Power PWR 3V3 power Used for feeding -48 V DC input power
supply connector
socket

Monitoring MON RJ45 connector Port for monitoring and commissioning

port

Technical Specifications
This section describes the technical specifications of the LRFU, which include supported modes
and frequency Bands, RF Specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna capability.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 59

For the technical specifications of LRFU, see section “LRFU Technical Specifications” in the
3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.

3.1.11 LRFUe
LTE Radio Frequency Unit Type E (LRFUe) is an RF unit of LTE Frenquency Division Duplex
(FDD) and applies to LTE only scenario.

Panel
Figure 3-21 shows the panel of the LRFUe.

Figure 3-21 Panel of the LRFUe

Functions
The LRFUe processes uplink and downlink services and controls and monitors internal boards
or modules. Figure 3-22 shows the logical structure of the LRFUe.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 60

Figure 3-22 Logical structure of the LRFUe

LEDs
Table 3-21 describes the LEDs on the panel of the LRFUe.

Table 3-21 LEDs on the LRFUe

Label Color Status Description

RUN Green On There is power supply, but the module

breaks down or is verifying the
software version.

Off The module works properly.

Blinking (on for 1s and The module is loading software.

off for 1s)

Blinking (on for 0.125s There is no power supply, or the

and off for 0.125s) module breaks down.

ALM Red On Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are

generated, and the module must be
replaced.

Blinking (on for 1s and Alarms are generated. The alarms may
off for 1s) be caused by the faults on the related
boards or ports. Therefore, the
necessity for module replacement is
uncertain.

Off No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) is

generated.

ACT Green On The module works properly with the

TX channel enabled.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 61

Label Color Status Description

Blinking (on for 1s and The module works properly with the
off for 1s) TX channel disabled.

VSWR Red On (red) A VSWR-related alarm is generated at

the ANT_TX/RXA port.

Blinking (on for 1s and A VSWR-related alarm is generated at

off for 1s) the ANT_TX/RXB port.

Blinking (on for 0.125s A VSWR-related alarm is generated at

and off for 0.125s) the ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_TX/
RXB ports.

Off (red) No VSWR alarm is generated.

CPRI0 Red/Green On (green) The CPRI links are normal.

On (red) The reception of the optical module is

abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
and off for 1s)

Off The SFP module is out of position, or

the optical module is powered off.

CPRI1 Red/Green On (green) The CPRI links are normal.

On (red) The reception of the optical module is

abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
and off for 1s)

Off The SFP module is out of position, or

the optical module is powered off.

Port
Table 3-22 describes the ports on the panel of the LRFUe.

Table 3-22 Ports on the panel of the LRFUe

Port Label Connector Description

RF port ANT_TX/ DIN RF TX/RX port for connecting to the

RXB connector antenna system

ANT_TX/ DIN
RXA connector

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 62

Port Label Connector Description

Interconnecti RX_INB QMA female Input port for diversity RX

on port for connector
receiving RF
signals RX_OUTA QMA female Output port for main RX
connector

CPRI port CPRI0 SFP female Used for the connection to the BBU. CPRI0
connector port and CPRI1 port work in mutual
backup mode.

CPRI1 SFP female Used for the connection to the BBU. CPRI1
connector port and CPRI0 port work in mutual
backup mode.

Power supply PWR 3V3 power Used for feeding -48 V DC input power
socket connector

Monitoring MON RJ45 Port for monitoring and commissioning

port connector

Technical Specifications
This section describes the technical specifications of the LRFUe, which include supported modes
and frequency bands, RF specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna capability.

For the technical specifications of LRFUe, see section “LRFUe Technical Specifications” in the
3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.

3.1.12 CRFUd
CDMA radio frequency unit type D (CRFUd) is an RF unit of LTE Frequency Division Duplex
(LTE FDD) and applies to LTE only scenarios.

Panel
Figure 3-23 shows the CRFUd panel.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 63

Figure 3-23 CRFUd panel

Functions
The CRFUd performs the following functions:
l Receives UL RF signals from the antenna system and then down-converts the received
signals to IF signals. After amplification, analog-to-digital conversion, digital down-
conversion, and matched filtering, the IF signals are sent to the BBU for further processing.
l Receives DL baseband signals from the BBU, filters DL signals, performs digital-to-analog
conversion, and up-converts RF signals to the TX band.
l Multiplexes RX and TX signals, which enables these signals to share the same antenna
path. It also filters the RX and TX signals.

Principles
The CRFUd consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier,
and duplex unit. Figure 3-24 shows the logic structure of the CRFUd.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 64

Figure 3-24 Logic structure of the CRFUd

Indicators
Table 3-23 describes the indicators on the CRFUd panel.

Table 3-23 Indicators on the CRFUd panel

Indicato Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is power supply, but the CRFUd

is faulty or the version is being checked.

Blinking (on for 1s and The CRFUd works properly.

off for 1s)

Blinking (on for 0.125s The CRFUd is loading software.

and off for 0.125s)

Steady off There is no power supply or the CRFUd

is faulty.

ALM Red Steady on Alarms (not including VSWR-related

alarms) are generated and the CRFUd
needs to be replaced.

Blinking (on for 1s and Alarms are generated. The alarms may
off for 1s) be caused by the faults on the related
boards or ports. Therefore, you must
locate the fault before replacing the
CRFUd.

Steady off No alarm (not including VSWR-related

alarms) is generated.

ACT Green Steady on The CRFUd works properly with the

TX channel enabled.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 65

Indicato Color Status Description

Blinking (on for 1s and The CRFUd works properly with the
off for 1s) TX channel disabled.

VSWR Red Steady on A VSWR-related alarm is generated on

the ANT_TX/RXA port.

Blinking (on for 1s and A VSWR-related alarm is generated on

off for 1s) the ANT_TX/RXB port.

Blinking (on for 0.125s A VSWR-related alarm is generated on

and off for 0.125s) the ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_TX/RXB
ports.

Steady off No VSWR-related alarm is generated.

CPRI0 Red and Steady green The CPRI link is functioning properly.
green
Steady red The optical module fails to receive
signals.

Blinking red (on for 1s The CPRI link is out of lock.

and off for 1s)

Steady off The SFP module is not properly

installed, or the optical module is
powered off.

CPRI1 Red and Steady green The CPRI link is functioning properly.
green
Steady red The optical module fails to receive
signals.

Blinking red (on for 1s The CPRI link is out of lock.

and off for 1s)

Steady off The SFP module is not properly

installed, or the optical module is
powered off.

Ports
Table 3-24 describes the ports on the CRFUd panel.

Table 3-24 Ports on the CRFUd panel

Port Type Silkscreen Connector Description

RF port ANT_TX/ DIN Connects to the antenna system.

RXB connector

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 66

Port Type Silkscreen Connector Description

ANT_TX/ DIN
RXA connector

Interconnecti RX_INB QMA female Receives diversity signals in the antenna

on port for channel.
receiving RF
signals RX_OUTA QMA female Transmits diversity signals in the antenna
channel.

CPRI port CPRI0 SFP female Connects to the BBU. CPRI0 port and
connector CPRI1 port work in mutual backup mode.

CPRI1 SFP female Connects to the BBU. CPRI1 port and

connector CPRI0 port work in mutual backup mode.

Power supply PWR 3V3 power Feeds -48 V DC input power.

socket connector

Monitoring MON RJ45 Used for monitoring and commissioning.

port connector

Technical Specifications
This section describes the technical specifications of the CRFUd, which include supported
modes and frequency bands, RF specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna
capability.

For the technical specifications of CRFUd, see section “CRFUd Technical Specifications” in
the 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.

3.2 RRU
The Radio Remote Unit (RRU) converts and forwards signals between the BBU and the antenna
system.

The RRU implements the following functions:

l Receives downlink baseband data from the BBU and sends uplink baseband data for the
communication between the BBU and the RRU.
l The RX channel receives RF signals from the antenna system, down-converts the received
signals to IF signals, amplifies the IF signals, and performs analog-to-digital (A/D)
conversion. The TX channel filters downlink signals, performs digital-to-analog (D/A)
conversion, and up-converts RF signals to the TX band.
l Multiplexes RX and TX signals, which enables these signals to share the same antenna
path. It also filters the RX and TX signals.

For details about various types of RRUs, see the hardware description of the corresponding RRU.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 67

3.3 BBU3900
This section presents the exterior of the BBU3900 and describes the boards in the BBU3900 and
their panels, functions, indicators, ports, and engineering specifications.

3.3.1 BBU3900
The BBU3900, which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 2 U high.

The dimensions of the BBU3900 are 86 mm x 442 mm x 310 mm (3.39 in. x 17.4 in. x 12.2 in.)
(H x W x D), as shown in Figure 3-25.

Figure 3-25 BBU3900

The Electronic Serial Number (ESN) is a unique identifier of a Network Element (NE). It is used
during base station commissioning.
l If there is a label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on the label and a mounting
ear of the BBU, as shown in Figure 3-26.

Figure 3-26 ESN (1)

l If there is no label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on a mounting ear of
the BBU, as shown in Figure 3-27.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 68

Figure 3-27 ESN (2)

3.3.2 BBU3900 Functions

The BBU3900 is a baseband processing unit. It processes the baseband signals of the base station.

The BBU3900 performs the following functions:

l Provides ports for communication between the base station and the BSC or RNC.
l Provides CPRI ports for communication between the BBU and the RFUs.
l Provides USB(1) ports. A USB flash drive that stores required software and configuration
data can be inserted into the USB port to perform the automatic base station upgrade.
l Provides an OM channel between the base station and the LMT or the M2000 to operate
and maintain the base station.
l Processes uplink and downlink data.
l Manages the entire dual-mode system in terms of OM and signaling processing.
l Provides the system clock.
NOTE
(1) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption. The TST port is used for commissioning the
base station rather than importing or exporting the base station configuration.

3.3.3 BBU3900 Technical Specifications

This section describes the technical specifications of the BBU, which include capacity,
transmission ports, input power specifications, equipment specifications, environment
specifications, and surge protection specifications.

For details about technical specifications of a BBU3900, see section "BBU3900 Technical
Specifications" in the 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.

3.3.4 BBU3900 Slot Assignment

This section describes the slot assignment principles for BBU boards in the following scenarios:
BBU3900 GSM, BBU3900 UMTS, BBU3900 LTE, BBU3900 GSM+UMTS (GU for short),
BBU3900 GSM+LTE (GL for short), BBU3900 UMTS+LTE (UL for short), BBU3900 GU+L
(BBU not interconnected), BBU3900 GL+U (BBU not interconnected), BBU3900 GU+L
(UCIU+UMPT), BBU3900 GL+U (UCIU+UMPT), and BBU3900 GU+UL (UCIU+UMPT).

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 69

Slots in the BBU3900

Slots in the BBU3900 are the same in different scenarios, as shown in Figure 3-28.

Figure 3-28 Slots in the BBU3900

BBU3900 GSM
Table 3-25 lists the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GSM.

Table 3-25 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GSM

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 It must be

configured in
slot 6, with both
slots 5 and 6
occupied.

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It must be

configured in
slot 16.

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEU

is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0 or 1 It is referentially

configured in
slot 1.
When
configured with
two satellite
cards, it is
configured in
slot 1 (with both
slots 0 and 1
occupied).

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 70

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

UTRP Optional 1 Slot 0 or 4 It is

preferentially
configured in
slot 4.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

UCIU Optional 1 Slot 0 or 4 It is

preferentially
configured in
slot 4.

UBRI Optional 1 Slot 2 -

Figure 3-29 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 GSM.

Figure 3-29 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 GSM

BBU3900 UMTS
Table 3-26 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UMTS.

Table 3-26 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UMTS

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

WMPT/UMPT Mandatory 2 Slot 6 or 7 A single UMPT

or WMPT is
preferentially
configured in
slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 71

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

WBBP Mandatory 6 Slots 0 to 5 It is configured

in slot 3 by
default.
l If more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3 or 2.
l If no more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3, 0, 1, 2,
4, or 5.
The slot
assignment
principles for
the WBBP
boards are as
follows:
l The WBBPd
or WBBPf is
preferentiall
y configured
in slot 3 or 2.
The WBBPf
takes
precedence
over the
WBBPd in
slot
assignment.
l If five or
more
WBBPs are
required,
ensure that a
WBBP is

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 72

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

installed in
each of slots
2 and 3. At
least one of
the WBBPs
in slots 2 and
3 is WBBPd
or WBBPf.
l If both slots
2 and 3 are
occupied by
the WBBPa
or WBBPb
boards,
exchange
boards to
ensure that
the WBBPd
or WBBPf is
configured
in slot 3 or 2.
l If the
WBBPf4 is
installed in
the same
BBU as the
WBBPf1,
WBBPf2,
and
WBBPf3,
the WBBPf4
is
preferentiall
y installed in
slots 2 and 3.

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It must be

configured in
slot 16.

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEU

is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 73

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

UTRP Optional 2 Slot 0, 1, 4, 5, or A single UTRP

6 is preferentially
configured in
slot 4. If more
UTRPs are
required, the
UTRP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 4, 5, 0, 1,
or 6.
If several
UTRPs are
configured, the
priority of them
as following:
UTRPc,
UTRP6,
UTRP9,
UTRP2,
UTRP3/UTRP4

USCU Optional 1 Slot 1 or 0 It is

preferentially
configured in
slot 1.
When
configured with
two satellite
cards, it is
configured in
slot 1 (with both
slots 0 and 1
occupied).

Figure 3-30 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 UMTS.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 74

Figure 3-30 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 UMTS

BBU3900 LTE
Table 3-27 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 LTE.

Table 3-27 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 LTE

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

LMPT/UMPT Mandatory 2 Slot 6 or 7 A single LMPT

or UMPT is
preferentially
configured in
slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.

LBBP Mandatory 6 Slots 0 to 5 A single LBBP

is preferentially
configured in
slot 3.
If more LBBPs
are required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 1, 2, 0,
4, or 5.

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configured

only in slot 16.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 75

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEU

is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

UTRP Optional 1 Slot 4 or 5 It is

preferentially
configured in
slot 4.

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0, 1, 4, or 5 A single USCU

is preferentially
configured in
slot 5. A USCU
that occupies 1
U space is
configured in
slot 5 (with both
slots 5 and 4
occupied).
If slots 4 and 5
are occupied, a
USCU is
preferentially
configured in
slot 1, or a
USCU that uses
a dual-satellite
card is
configured in
slot 1, with both
slots 1 and 0
occupied.

Figure 3-31 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 LTE.

Figure 3-31 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 LTE

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 76

BBU3900 GU
Table 3-28 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GU.

Table 3-28 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GU

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

WMPT/UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 The WMPT or

UMPT is
configured only
in slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.

GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 It is configured

only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 77

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

WBBP Mandatory 5 Slots 0 to 4 It is configured

in slot 3 by
default.
l If more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3 or 2.
l If no more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3, 0, 1, 2,
or 4.
If a WBBPd or
WBBPf is
required, it is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3 or 2.
If five or more
WBBPs are
required, ensure
that a WBBP is
installed in each
of slots 2 and 3.
At least one of
the WBBPs in
slots 2 and 3 is
WBBPd or
WBBPf.
The WBBPf
takes
precedence over
the WBBPd
during slot
assignment.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 78

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configured

only in slot 16.

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEU

is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

UTRP Optional 2 Slot 0 or 4 It is

preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
The UTRP in
GSM mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
UMTS mode
during slot
assignment.

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0, 1, or 4 It is

preferentially
configured in
slot 4.

UBRI Optional 1 Slot 2 -

Figure 3-32 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 GU.

Figure 3-32 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 GU

BBU3900 GL
Table 3-29 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GL.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 79

Table 3-29 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GL

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

LMPT/UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 It is configured

only in slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.

GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 It is configured

only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).

LBBP Mandatory 5 Slots 0 to 4 A single LBBP

is preferentially
configured in
slot 3.
If more LBBPs
are required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 1, 2, 0,
or 4.

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configured

only in slot 16.

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEU

is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

UTRP Optional 2 Slot 0 or 4 It is

preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
The UTRP in
GSM mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
LTE mode
during slot
assignment.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 80

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0, 1, or 4 It is

preferentially
configured in
slot 4.

UBRI Optional 1 Slot 2 -

Figure 3-33 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 GL.

Figure 3-33 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 GL

BBU3900 UL
Table 3-30 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL.

Table 3-30 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

LMPT/UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 6 It is configured

only in slot 6.

WMPT/UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 It is configured

only in slot 7.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 81

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

LBBP Mandatory 5 Slot 0, 1, 2, 4, or A single LBBP

5 is configured
only in slot 2. If
more LBBPs are
required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 2, 1, 0, 4,
or 5.

WBBP Mandatory 5 Slot 0, 1, 3, 4, or A single WBBP

5 is configured
only in slot 3. If
more WBBPs
are required, the
WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 0, 1, 4,
or 5.
If a WBBPd or
WBBPf is
required, it is
configured only
in slot 3.
The WBBP,
which provides
a maximum of
six CPRI ports,
is configured in
either slot 2 or
slot 3.

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configured

only in slot 16.

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEU

is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 82

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

UTRP Optional 2 Slot 4 or 5 It is

preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
The UTRP in
UMTS mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
LTE mode
during slot
assignment.

USCU Optional 1 Slot 4 or 5 It is

preferentially
configured in
slot 4.

Figure 3-34 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 UL.

Figure 3-34 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 UL

BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs not Interconnected)

BBU3900 GU describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supporting the
GU mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs not interconnected).

BBU3900 LTE describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supporting
the LTE mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs not interconnected).

BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs not Interconnected)

BBU3900 GL describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supporting the
GL mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs not interconnected).

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 83

BBU3900 UMTS describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supporting
the UMTS mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs not interconnected).

BBU3900 GU+L (UCIU+UMPT)

Table 3-31 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0 supporting the GU
mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+L (UCIU+UMPT).

Table 3-31 Slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

WMPT/UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 The WMPT or

UMPT is
configured only
in slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.

GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 It is configured

only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 84

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

WBBP Mandatory 4 Slots 0 to 3 It is configured

in slot 3 by
default.
l If more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3 or 2.
l If no more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3, 0, 1, or
2.
If a WBBPd is
required, it is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3 or 2.
If five or more
WBBPs are
required, ensure
that two WBBPs
are installed in
slots 2 and 3. At
least one of the
two WBBPs is
WBBPd.

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configured

only in slot 16.

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEU

is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 85

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

UTRP Optional 1 Slot 0 or 1 It is

preferentially
configured in
slot 0.

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0 or 1 It is

preferentially
configured in
slot 0.

UBRI Optional 1 Slot 2 -

UCIU Mandatory 1 Slot 0, Slot 1, The UCIU is

Slot 4, or slot 5 installed in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 4, 5, 0, or
1.

Table 3-32 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU1 supporting the LTE
mode.

Table 3-32 Slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU1

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

UMPT Mandatory 2 Slot 6 or 7 A single UMPT

is preferentially
configured in
slot 7.

LBBP Mandatory 6 Slots 0 to 5 A single LBBP

is preferentially
configured in
slot 3.
If more LBBPs
are required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 1, 2, 0,
4, or 5.

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configured

only in slot 16.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 86

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEU

is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

UTRP Optional 1 Slot 4 or 5 It is

preferentially
configured in
slot 4.

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0, 1, 4, or 5 A single USCU

NOTE
The UCIU, UTRP, and USCU are configured in descending order of priority.

BBU3900 GL+U (UCIU+UMPT)

Table 3-33 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0 supporting the GL
mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GL+U (UCIU+UMPT).

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 87

Table 3-33 Slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

LMPT/UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 It is configured

only in slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.
The UMPT
must be
configured as
the main control
board in the
UCIU+UMPT
cascading
scenario.

GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 It is configured

only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).

LBBP Mandatory 4 Slot 0 to slot 3 A single LBBP

is preferentially
configured in
slot 3.
If more LBBPs
are required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 1, 2, or
0.

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configured

only in slot 16.

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEU

is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 88

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

UTRP Optional 1 Slot 0 or 1 It is

preferentially
configured in
slot 0.
The UTRP in
GSM mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
LTE mode
during slot
assignment.

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0 or 1 It is

preferentially
configured in
slot 0.
When
configured with
two satellite
cards, it is
configured in
slot 1 (with both
slots 0 and 1
occupied).

UBRI Optional 1 Slot 2 -

UCIU Mandatory 1 Slot 0, Slot 1, The UCIU is

Slot 4, or slot 5 installed in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 4, 5, 0, or
1.

Table 3-34 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU1 supporting the
UMTS mode.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 89

Table 3-34 Slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU1

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

UMPT Mandatory 2 Slot 6 or 7 A single UMPT

is preferentially
configured in
slot 7.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 90

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

WBBP Mandatory 6 Slots 0 to 5 It is configured

in slot 3 by
default.
l If more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3 or 2.
l If no more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3, 0, 1, 2,
4, or 5.
If a WBBPd or
WBBPf is
required, it is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3 or 2.
If five or more
WBBPs are
required, ensure
that a WBBP is
installed in each
of slots 2 and 3.
At least one of
the WBBPs in
slots 2 and 3 is
WBBPd or
WBBPf.
The WBBPf
takes
precedence over
the WBBPd
during slot
assignment.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 91

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It must be

configured in
slot 16.

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEU

is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

UTRP Optional 2 Slot 0, 1, 4, 5, or A single UTRP

6 is preferentially
configured in
slot 4. If more
UTRPs are
required, the
UTRP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 4, 5, 0, 1,
or 6.

USCU Optional 1 Slot 1 or 0 It is

preferentially
configured in
slot 1.
When
configured with
two satellite
cards, it is
configured in
slot 1 (with both
slots 0 and 1
occupied).

NOTE
The UCIU, UTRP, and USCU are configured in descending order of priority.

BBU3900 GU+UL (UCIU+UMPT)

Table 3-35 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0 supporting the GU
mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+UL (UCIU+UMPT).

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 92

Table 3-35 Slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

WMPT/UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 The WMPT or

UMPT is
configured only
in slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.

GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 It is configured

only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 93

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

WBBP Mandatory 4 Slot 0 to slot 3 It is configured

in slot 3 by
default.
l If more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3 or 2.
l If no more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3, 0, 1, or
2.
If a WBBPd or
WBBPf is
required, it is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3 or 2.
If five or more
WBBPs are
required, ensure
that a WBBP is
installed in each
of slots 2 and 3.
At least one of
the WBBPs in
slots 2 and 3 is
WBBPd or
WBBPf.
The WBBPf
takes
precedence over
the WBBPd
during slot
assignment.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 94

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configured

only in slot 16.

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEU

is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

UTRP Optional 1 Slot 0 or 1 It is

preferentially
configured in
slot 0.
The UTRP in
GSM mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
UMTS mode
during slot
assignment.

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0 or 1 It is

preferentially
configured in
slot 0.
When
configured with
two satellite
cards, it is
configured in
slot 1 (with both
slots 0 and 1
occupied).

UBRI Optional 1 Slot 2 -

UCIU Mandatory 1 Slot 0, Slot 1, The UCIU is

Slot 4, or slot 5 installed in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 4, 5, 0, or
1.

Table 3-36 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 95

Table 3-36 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 6 It is configured

only in slot 6.

UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 It is configured

only in slot 7.

LBBP Mandatory 5 Slot 0, 1, 2, 4, or A single LBBP

5 is configured
only in slot 2. If
more LBBPs are
required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 2, 1, 0, 4,
or 5.

WBBP Mandatory 5 Slot 0, 1, 3, 4, or A single WBBP

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configured

only in slot 16.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 96

Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Restriction

Mandatory Number

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEU

is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

UTRP Optional 1 Slot 4 or 5 It is

preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
The UTRP in
UMTS mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
LTE mode
during slot
assignment.

USCU Optional 1 Slot 4 or 5 It is

preferentially
configured in
slot 4.

NOTE
The UCIU, UTRP, and USCU are configured in descending order of priority.

3.3.5 GTMU
The GSM transmission and timing and management unit (GTMU) is the basic transmission and
control function entity of the BBU. It provides the reference clock, maintenance port, and
external alarm collection port, monitors the power, controls and manages the entire BTS.

Specifications
The GTMU is classified into two types: GTMU and GTMUb. Table 3-37 lists the transmission
specifications of the GTMU and GTMUb.

Table 3-37 Transmission specifications of the GTMU

Board Supported Transmissi Number of Port Full/Half-

Mode on Mode ports Capacity Duplex

GTMU/ GSM TDM over 1 Four Full-duplex

GTMUb E1/T1 channels

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 97

Board Supported Transmissi Number of Port Full/Half-

Mode on Mode ports Capacity Duplex

Transmissio 1 10 Mbit/s Full-duplex

n over FE and 100
optical ports Mbit/s

Transmissio 1 10 Mbit/s Full-duplex

n over FE and 100
electrical Mbit/s
ports

Table 3-38 lists the TRX specifications of the GTMU and GTMUb.

Table 3-38 TRX specifications of the GTMU

Board Supported Mode Transmission Maximum Carrier

Mode Number

GTMU GSM TDM 72

IP over FE or IP over 36
E1

GTMUb GSM TDM 126

IP over FE 60

IP over E1 48

Panel
Figure 3-35 and Figure 3-36 show the panels of the GTMU and GTMUb.

Figure 3-35 GTMU panel

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 98

Figure 3-36 GTMUb panel

Functions
The GTMU performs the following functions:

l Controls, maintains, and operates the base station.

l Supports fault management, configuration management, performance management, and
security management.
l Monitors the fans and power modules.
l Provides and manages the clock of the base station in centralized mode.
l Provides the clock output for test.
l Provides a port for maintenance on the OM system.
l Supports the transmission of four paths of E1 signals and two paths of FE signals.
l Provides CPRI ports for communication between the BBU and the RFUs.

Indicators
Table 3-39 describes the indicators on the GTMU.

Table 3-39 Indicators on the GTMU

Silkscreen Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is power supply, but the

board is faulty.

Steady off There is no power supply, or the

board is faulty.

On for 1s and off for The board is running properly.

On for 0.125s and off Software is being loaded to the

for 0.125s board.

ALM Red Steady on An alarm is generated, and the

board must be replaced.

Steady off There is no fault.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 99

Silkscreen Color Status Description

On for 1s and off for An alarm is generated and you

1s need to locate the fault before
deciding whether to replace the
board.

ACT Green Steady on The board serves as an active

board.

On for 0.125s and off The OML is disconnected.

for 0.125s

Besides the preceding three indicators, there are some other indicators on the board, indicating
the connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, CPRI port, and commissioning
port. They are near the corresponding ports and have no silkscreen. Table 3-40 describes the
indicators.

Table 3-40 Indicators for ports

Indicator Color Status Description

LIU0 to LIU3 Green Steady on An E1/T1 local alarm

is generated.

On for 1s and off for An E1/T1 remote

1s alarm is generated.

Steady off The link is

functional.

CPRI0 to CPRI5 Red or green Steady green The CPRI link is

functioning properly.

Steady red An optical module

fails to receive or
transmit signals
because of the
following reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 100

Indicator Color Status Description

Steady off l The optical

module cannot be
detected.
l The CPRI cable is
not connected.

ETH Green (LINK Steady on The connection is set

indicator on the left up successfully.
side)
Steady off No connection is set
up.

Orange (ACT Blinking Data is being

indicator on the right transmitted or
side) received.

Steady off No data is being

transmitted or
received.

FE0 Green (LINK Steady on The connection is set

indicator on the left up successfully.
side)
Steady off No connection is set
up.

Orange (ACT Blinking Data is being

indicator on the right transmitted or
side) received.

Steady off No data is being

transmitted or
received.

FE1 (on the Green (LINK Steady on The connection is set

GTMUb) indicator on the left up successfully.
side)

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 101

Indicator Color Status Description

Steady off No connection is set

up.

Green (ACT Blinking Data is being

indicator on the right transmitted or
side) received.

Steady off No data is being

transmitted or
received.

M_S (on the - - This is the indicator

GTMUb) for the reserved port.

EXT (on the - - This is the indicator

GTMUb) for the reserved port.

Ports
Table 3-41 describes the ports on the GTMU.

Table 3-41 Ports on the GTMU

Silkscreen Connector Description

CPRI0 to CPRI5 SFP female Data transmission port interconnected to the RF

connector module. It supports the input and output of optical
and electrical transmission signals.

EXT (on the SFP female Reserved

GTMUb) connector

ETH(1) RJ45 connector Local maintenance and commissioning port

FE0 RJ45 connector Connected to the routers in the equipment room

through FE cables to transmit network
information

FE1 DLC connector Connected to the routers in the equipment room

through fiber optic cables to transmit network
information

TST(2) USB connector Port for clock signal outputs

USB(3) USB connector Used for automatic software upgrade through the
USB flash drive

E1/T1 DB26 female Used for four E1/T1 inputs and outputs between
connector the GTMU and the UELP or between BSCs

RST - Used for resetting the GTMU

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 102

NOTE

(1) Before accessing the base station through the ETH port, ensure that an OM port has been opened and
the user has obtained required authorities for accessing the base station through the OM port.
(2) The TST port is used for commissioning the base station rather than importing or exporting the base
station configuration.
(3) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption.

The following table lists the specifications of CPRI ports on the GTMU and GTMUb.

Table 3-42 Specifications of CPRI ports on the GTMU and GTMUb

Board Quantity of CPRI CPRI Port Rate Topology Type

Ports (Gbit/s)

GTMU 6 1.25 Star, chain, and ring

topologies

GTMUb 6 1.25/2.5 Star, chain, and ring

topologies

DIP Switch
On the GTMU, there are five DIP switches, each of which has four bits. DIP switches S1 and
S2 need to be set jointly. The functions of the five DIP switches are as follows:

l S1 is used to select the E1 resistance. Table 3-43 provides details on the DIP switch.
l S2 is used to select the grounding mode of E1/T1 transmission cables. Table 3-44 provides
details on the DIP switch.
l S3 is reserved.
l S4 is used to select the E1 bypass. Table 3-45 provides details on the DIP switch.
l S5 is used for timeslot settings when the E1 bypass is selected. Table 3-46 provides details
on the DIP switch.

Table 3-43 Description on S1

DIP DIP Setting Description

Switch
1 2 3 4

S1 ON ON OFF OFF The E1 resistance is set to

75 ohm.

OFF ON OFF OFF The E1 resistance is set to

120 ohm.

ON OFF OFF OFF The T1 resistance is set to

100 ohm.

Others Unavailable

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 103

NOTE

Bits 3 and 4 of S1 should be kept the factory-delivered configuration, without any manual setting on site.
The out-of-factory state should be OFF. If the bits are ON, set them to OFF.

Table 3-44 Description on S2

DIP DIP Setting Description

Switch
1 2 3 4

S2 OFF OFF OFF OFF All the bits are set to

OFF by default in all
modes.

ON ON ON ON When error codes are

received over the four
E1 RX links in 75 ohm,
all the bits of S2 must
be set to ON to rectify
the faults on the E1
links.

Others Unavailable

Table 3-45 Description on S4

DIP DIP Setting Description

Switch
1 2 3 4

S4 ON ON ON ON Supporting E1 bypass

OFF OFF OFF OFF Not supporting E1

bypass

Others Unavailable

Table 3-46 Description on S5

DIP DIP Setting Description

Switch
1 2 3 4

S5 ON ON ON ON Not supporting E1
bypass

OFF ON ON OFF Supporting E1 bypass

of level-1 cascaded
base stations

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 104

DIP DIP Setting Description

Switch
1 2 3 4

ON OFF ON OFF Supporting E1 bypass

of level-2 cascaded
base stations

OFF OFF ON OFF Supporting E1 bypass

of level-3 cascaded
BTSs

ON ON OFF OFF Supporting E1 bypass

of level-4 cascaded
BTSs

OFF ON OFF OFF Supporting E1 bypass

of level-5 cascaded
BTSs

3.3.6 WMPT
The WCDMA main processing and transmission unit (WMPT) processes signals for the
BBU3900 and manages resources for other boards in the BBU3900.

Specifications
Table 3-47 lists the WMPT specifications.

Table 3-47 WMPT specifications

Board Applicable Transmissi Number of Port Full/Half-

Mode on Mode ports Capacity Duplex

WMPT UMTS ATM over 1 Four Full-duplex

E1/T1 or IP channels
over E1/T1

Transmissio 1 10 Mbit/s Full-duplex

n over FE and 100
optical ports Mbit/s

Transmissio 1 10 Mbit/s Full-duplex

n over FE and 100
electrical Mbit/s
ports

NOTE
For combined signaling specifications of the WMPT, see section "Signaling Specifications" in 3900 Series
Base Station Technical Description.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 105

Panel
Figure 3-37 shows the panel of the WMPT.

Figure 3-37 WMPT panel

Functions
The WMPT performs the following functions:

l Performs functions such as configuration management, equipment management,

performance monitoring, signaling processing, and active and standby switchover, and
provides OM channel to communicate with the LMT or M2000.
l Provides a reference clock for the system.
l Processes signaling and manages resources for other boards in the BBU3900.
l Provides USB ports. A USB flash drive that stores required software and configuration data
can be inserted into the USB port to perform the automatic base station upgrade.
l Provides a 4-channel E1/T1 port over ATM or IP.
l Provides an FE electrical port and an FE optical port over IP.

Indicators
Table 3-48 describes the indicators on the WMPT panel.

Table 3-48 Indicators on the WMPT panel

Silkscreen Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is power

supply, but the board
is faulty.

Steady off There is no power

supply, or the board
is faulty.

On for 1s and off for The board is

1s functioning properly.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 106

Silkscreen Color Status Description

On for 0.125s and off l Data or software

for 0.125s is being loaded to
the board.
l The board is not
started.

ALM Red Steady on An alarm is

generated, and the
board must be
replaced.

Steady off The board is running

properly.

On for 1s and off for An alarm is

1s generated and you
need to locate the
fault before deciding
whether to replace
the board.

ACT Green Steady on The board serves as

an active board.

Steady off l The board does

not serve as an
active board.
l The board has not
been activated.
l The board is not
providing any
services.

On for 0.125s and off The operation and

for 0.125s maintenance link
(OML) is
disconnected.

On for 1s and off for The board is being

1s tested, such as an
RRU Voltage
Standing Wave Ratio
(VSWR) test through
a USB(2)(3) flash
drive.

In addition to the preceding three indicators, there are six indicators on the board panel, which
indicate the connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, and commissioning

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 107

Ethernet port. The six indicators do not have silkscreen on the WMPT panel, whereas they are
at both sides of the corresponding ports, as shown in Figure 3-38.

Figure 3-38 Port status indicators on the WMPT panel

Table 3-49 describes the port status indicators on the WMPT panel.

Table 3-49 Port status indicators

Indicator Color Status Description

FE1 optical port Green (LINK on the Steady on The connection is set
status indicators left side) up successfully.

Steady off No connection is set

up.

Orange (ACT on the Blinking Data is being

right side) transmitted or
received.

Steady off No data is being

transmitted or
received.

FE0 electrical port Green (LINK on the Steady on The connection is set
status indicators left side) up successfully.

Steady off No connection is set

up.

Orange (ACT on the Blinking Data is being

right side) transmitted or
received.

Steady off No data is being

transmitted or
received.

ETH port indicators Green (LINK on the Steady on The connection is set
left side) up successfully.

Steady off No connection is set

up.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 108

Indicator Color Status Description

Orange (ACT on the Blinking Data is being

right side) transmitted or
received.

Steady off No data is being

transmitted or
received.

Ports
Table 3-50 describes the ports on the WMPT panel.

Table 3-50 Ports on the WMPT panel

Silkscreen Connector Description

E1/T1 port DB26 female connector E1/T1 port

FE0 RJ45 connector FE electrical port

FE1 SFP female connector FE optical port

GPS SMA connector Reserved

ETH(1) RJ45 connector Local maintenance and

commissioning port

TST(2) USB connector Port for clock signal outputs

USB(3) USB connector USB loading port

RST - Used for resetting the WMPT

NOTE

DIP Switch
The WMPT has two DIP switches: SW1 and SW2. SW1 is used to set the work mode of the E1/
T1 signal cable, and SW2 is used to set the resistance of the four E1/T1 signal cables in different
modes. Figure 3-39 shows the DIP switch settings of the WMPT.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 109

Figure 3-39 DIP switch settings of the WMPT

Table 3-51 and Table 3-52 list the DIP switch settings of the WMPT.

Table 3-51 Settings of the DIP switch SW1 on the WMPT

DIP DIP Status Description

Switch
1 2 3 4

SW1 ON ON OFF OFF T1

OFF OFF ON ON The E1

resistance is
set to 120
ohm.

ON ON ON ON The E1
resistance is
set to 75 ohm.

Others Unavailable

Table 3-52 Settings of the DIP switch SW2 on the WMPT

DIP DIP Status Description

Switch
1 2 3 4

SW2 OFF OFF OFF OFF Balanced

ON ON ON ON Imbalanced

Others Unavailable

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 110

3.3.7 UMPT
The universal main processing and transmission unit (UMPT) processes signals and manages
resources on other boards in the BBU3900.

NOTE
UMPTb1 is supported in NodeB V200R014C00SPC370 and later versions.

Specifications of the UMPT

The UMPT is classified into four types: UMPTa1, UMPTb1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6. Table
3-53 lists the specifications of the UMPTa1, UMPTb1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6.

Table 3-53 Specifications of the UMPT

Board Applicable Transmissi Number of Port Full/Half-

Mode on Mode ports Capacity Duplex

UMPTa1/ UMTS ATM over 1 Four -

UMPTb1 E1/T1 or IP channels
over E1/T1

Transmissio 1 10 Mbit/s, Full-duplex

n over FE/ 100 Mbit/s,
GE electrical or 1000
ports Mbit/s

Transmissio 1 100 Mbit/s or Full- or half-

n over FE/ 1000 Mbit/s duplex
GE optical
ports

UMPTa2/ LTE IP over E1/ 1 Four -

UMPTa6 T1 channels

Transmissio 1 10 Mbit/s, Full-duplex

n over FE/ 100 Mbit/s,
GE electrical or 1000
ports Mbit/s

Transmissio 1 100 Mbit/s or Full- or half-

n over FE/ 1000 Mbit/s duplex
GE optical
ports

The following table describes the signaling specifications of the UMPTa2, or UMPTa6 working
in LTE mode.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 111

Table 3-54 Signaling specifications

Board Signaling Specifications (BHCA)

UMPTa2/UMPTa6 60000

The following table describes the data radio bearer (DRB) specifications and maximum number
of users supported by the UMPTa2, or UMPTa6 working in LTE mode.

Table 3-55 Data radio bearer specifications

Board Maximum Number of Users

UMPTa2/UMPTa6 10800

The maximum of data radio bearers (DRBs) supported by the UMPTa2/UMPTa6 working in
LTE mode is three times the maximum number of UEs in RRC_Connected mode.

NOTE
For signaling specifications of the eNodeB and NodeB, see section "Signaling Specifications" in 3900
Series Base Station Technical Description. For the maximum number of DRBs and the maximum number
of UEs in RRC connected mode supported by the eNodeB, see section "Baseband Specifications" in 3900
Series Base Station Technical Description.

Panel
Figure 3-40, Figure 3-42, Figure 3-41 and Figure 3-43 show the panels of the UMPT boards.

Figure 3-40 UMPTa1 Panel

Figure 3-41 UMPTb1 Panel

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 112

Figure 3-42 UMPTa2 Panel

Figure 3-43 UMPTa6 Panel

NOTE
In the lower left of the UMPTa1, UMPTb1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6, there are silkscreens UMPTa1,
UMPTb1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6, respectively, indicating their board types.

Functions
The UMPT performs the following functions:

l Performs configuration management, device management, performance monitoring,

signaling message processing, and active/standby switchover.
l Controls all boards in the system.
l Provides the reference clock for the entire system.
l Implements transmission and provides absolute time and 1 pulse per second (PPS) reference
clock source while being equipped with a single satellite card.
l Provides four E1 ports and two FE/GE ports to implement basic transmission in compliance
with Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Internet Protocol (IP), and Point-to-Point
Protocol (PPP) during the initial configuration.

Ports
Table 3-56 describes the ports on the UMPT.

Table 3-56 Ports on the UMPT

Silkscreen Connector Description

FE/GE1 SFP female A 100 Mbit/s or 1000 Mbit/s adaptive Ethernet

connector optical port is used for transmitting service data
and signaling messages.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 113

Silkscreen Connector Description

FE/GE0 RJ45 connector A 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or 1000 Mbit/s adaptive

Ethernet electrical port is used for transmitting
service data and signaling messages.

USB(1) USB connector The USB port with the USB silkscreen is used for
the software upgrade of a base station using a USB
flash driver. This port also functions as a
commissioning Ethernet port(2).
The USB port with the CLK silkscreen functions
as follows:
l Receives TOD signals.
l Port for clock signal outputs.

E1/T1 DB26 female The port is used for four E1/T1 signal inputs and
connector outputs between the UMPT and universal E1/T1
lightning protection unit (UELP) or between base
station controllers.

GPS SMA connector The GPS port on the UMPTa1, UMPTb1, or

UMPTa2 is reserved.
The GPS port on the UMPTa6 is used for
transmitting radio frequency (RF) signals
received from the antenna to the satellite card.

CI SFP female The port is used for BBU interconnection.

connector

RST - The port is used to reset the board.

NOTE

(1) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption.

(2) When the USB port functions as a commissioning Ethernet port, ensure that an OM port has been opened
and the user has obtained required authorities for accessing the base station through the OM port before
accessing the base station through the USB port.

Indicators
Table 3-57 describes the indicators on the UMPT.

Table 3-57 Indicators on the UMPT

Silkscreen Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is power

supply, but the board
is faulty.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 114

Silkscreen Color Status Description

Steady off There is no power

supply, or the board
is faulty.

On for 1s and off for The board is

1s functioning properly.

On for 0.125s and off l The board is

for 0.125s being loaded or
configured.
l The board is not
started.

ALM Red Steady on An alarm is

generated, and the
board needs to be
replaced.

Steady off The board is running

properly.

On for 1s and off for An alarm is

1s generated, and you
need to locate the
fault before deciding
whether to replace
the board.

ACT Green Steady on The board serves as

an active board.

Steady off l The board does

not serve as an
active board.
l The board has not
been activated.
l The board is not
providing any
services.

On for 0.125s and off The operation and

for 0.125s maintenance link
(OML) is
disconnected.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 115

Silkscreen Color Status Description

On for 1s and off for The board is being

1s tested, such as an
RRU Voltage
Standing Wave Ratio
(VSWR) test through
a USB(1) flash drive.
NOTE
Of UMPT boards,
only the UMPTa1 has
this status.

In every 4s, the l All cells

indicator is on for corresponding to
0.125s and off for the subrack that
0.125s (eight times) houses this board
in the first 2s and then are not activated.
off for 2s. l The S1 link is
faulty.
NOTE
Of UMPT boards,
only the UMPTa2 and
UMPTa6 have this
status.

Besides the preceding three indicators, some other indicators indicate the connection status of
the FE/GE optical port, FE/GE electrical port, interconnection port, and E1/T1 port. The
indicators on the FE/GE optical port, FE/GE electrical port, interconnection port, and E1/T1
port, which have no silkscreen on the boards, are near the corresponding port, as shown in Figure
3-44.

Figure 3-44 Indicators for ports

Table 3-58 describes the indicators.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 116

Table 3-58 Indicators for ports

Indicator/ Color Status Definition

Silkscreen

LINK (silkscreen for Green Steady on The connection is

the optical port) normal.

Steady off The connection is

abnormal.

ACT (silkscreen for Orange Blinking Data is being

the optical port) transmitted.

Steady off No data is being

transmitted.

LINK (silkscreen for Green Steady on The connection is

the electrical port) normal.

Steady off The connection is

abnormal.

ACT (silkscreen for Orange Blinking Data is being

the electrical port) transmitted.

Steady off No data is being

transmitted.

CI Red or green Steady green The interconnection

link is normal.

Steady red An optical module

fails to receive
signals because of
one of the following
reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The optical cable
is broken.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 117

Indicator/ Color Status Definition

Silkscreen

Blinking red (on for Cables are connected

0.125s and off for in one of following
0.125s) incorrect manners:
l In the UCIU
+UMPT scenario,
the S0 port on the
UCIU is
connected to the
CI port on the
UMPT.
Indicators for the
S0 and CI ports
are blinking.
l The ports are
connected in ring
topology.
Indicators for all
incorrectly
connected ports
are blinking.

Steady off The optical module

cannot be detected.

R0, R1, R2 Red or green - Reserved

L01 Red or green Steady off E1/T1 link 0 and 1 is

not set up, or an LOS
alarm is generated.

Steady green E1/T1 links 0 and 1

are working
properly.

Blinking green (on E1/T1 link 0 is

for 1s and off for 1s) working properly,
but E1/T1 link 1 is
not set up or an LOS
alarm is generated.

Blinking green (on E1/T1 link 1 is

for 0.125s and off for working properly,
0.125s) but E1/T1 link 0 is
not set up or an LOS
alarm is generated.

Steady red Alarms are generated

on E1/T1 links 0 and
1.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 118

Indicator/ Color Status Definition

Silkscreen

Blinking red (on for An alarm is

1s and off for 1s) generated on E1/T1
link 0.

Blinking red (on for An alarm is

0.125s and off for generated on E1/T1
0.125s) link 1.

L23 Red or green Steady off E1/T1 link 2 and 3 is

not set up, or an LOS
alarm is generated.

Steady green E1/T1 links 2 and 3

are working
properly.

Blinking green (on E1/T1 link 2 is

for 1s and off for 1s) working properly,
but E1/T1 link 3 is
not set up or an LOS
alarm is generated.

Blinking green (on E1/T1 link 3 is

for 0.125s and off for working properly,
0.125s) but E1/T1 link 2 is
not set up or an LOS
alarm is generated.

Steady red Alarms are generated

on E1/T1 links 2 and
3.

Blinking red (on for An alarm is

1s and off for 1s) generated on E1/T1
link 2.

Blinking red (on for An alarm is

0.125s and off for generated on E1/T1
0.125s) link 3.

DIP Switch
Two DIP switches on the UMPT are labeled SW1 and SW2. Figure 3-45 shows the positions
of DIP switches on the UMPT.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 119

Figure 3-45 Positions of DIP switches on the UMPT

Each DIP switch has four bits. The DIP switches have the following functions:

l SW1 is used to select the E1/T1 mode. Table 3-59 describes the DIP switch.
l SW2 is used to select the grounding mode of E1/T1 transmission. Table 3-60 describes the
DIP switch.

Table 3-59 DIP switch SW1

DIP DIP Status Description

Switch
1 2 3 4

SW1 ON ON Reserved Reserved The E1 resistance is set to

75 ohms.

OFF ON The E1 resistance is set to

120 ohms.

ON OFF The T1 resistance is set to

100 ohms.

Table 3-60 DIP switch SW2

DIP DIP Status Description

Switch
1 2 3 4

SW2 OFF OFF OFF OFF Balanced

ON ON ON ON Unbalanced

3.3.8 LMPT
The LTE main processing and transmission unit (LMPT) manages the entire eNodeB system in
terms of OM and signaling processing and provides system clock for the BBU3900.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 120

Specifications
Table 3-61 lists the specifications of the LMPT.

Table 3-61 Specifications of the LMPT

Board Mode Transmissi Number of Port Full/Half-

on Mode ports Capacity Duplex

LMPT LTE Transmissio 2 10 Mbit/s, Full-duplex

n over FE/ 100 Mbit/s,
GE optical and 1000
ports Mbit/s

Transmissio 2 10 Mbit/s, Full-duplex

n over FE/ 100 Mbit/s,
GE electrical and 1000
ports Mbit/s

The following table describes the signaling specifications of the LMPT.

Table 3-62 Signaling specifications of the LMPT

Board Signaling Specifications (BHCA)

LMPT 40000

The following table lists the maximum number of UEs in RRC connected mode supported by
the LMPT.

Table 3-63 Maximum number of UEs in RRC connected mode

Board Maximum Number of UEs in RRC

Connected Mode

LMPT 5400

The maximum number of data radio bearers (DRBs) supported by an LMPT is three times the
maximum number of UEs in RRC connected mode.

NOTE
For signaling specifications of the eNodeB, see section "Signaling Specifications" in 3900 Series Base
Station Technical Description. For the maximum number of DRBs and the maximum number of UEs in
RRC connected mode supported by the eNodeB, see section "Baseband Specifications" in 3900 Series Base
Station Technical Description.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 121

Panel
Figure 3-46 shows the LMPT.

Figure 3-46 LMPT

Functions
The LMPT performs the following functions:

l Enables configuration management, device management, performance monitoring,

signaling processing, and radio source management
l Controls all boards in the system
l Provides the system clock
l Enables signal exchange between the eNodeB and MME/S-GW

Indicators
There are three indicators on the LMPT panel. Table 3-64 describes the indicators on the LMPT
panel and their status.

Table 3-64 Indicators on the LMPT panel

Silkscreen Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is power supply, but

the board is faulty.

Steady off There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.

On for 1s and off The board is functioning

for 1s properly.

On for 0.125s and l Software or data is being

off for 0.125s loaded to the board.
l The board is not started.

ALM Red Steady on An alarm is generated, and

the board needs to be
replaced.

Steady off The board is running

properly.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 122

Silkscreen Color Status Description

On for 1s and off An alarm is generated and

for 1s you need to locate the fault
before deciding whether to
replace the board.

ACT Green Steady on The board serves as an

active board.

Steady off l The board does not

serve as an active board.
l The board has not been
activated.
l The board is not
providing any services.

On for 0.125s and The OML is disconnected.

off for 0.125s

In every 4s, the l All cells corresponding

indicator is on for to the subrack that
0.125s and off for houses this board are not
0.125s (eight activated.
times) in the first l The S1 link is faulty.
2s and then off for
2s.

Besides the preceding three indicators, some other indicators used for indicating the connection
status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, and commissioning Ethernet port have no
silkscreen on the board. They are near the ports. Table 3-65 describes the indicators.

Table 3-65 Indicators

Silkscreen Color Status Description

SFP0 and SFP1 Green (LINK) Steady on The connection is set

up successfully.

Steady off No connection is set

up.

Orange (ACT) Blinking Data is being

transmitted or
received.

Steady off No data is being

transmitted or
received.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 123

Silkscreen Color Status Description

ETH Orange (ACT) Blinking Data is being

transmitted or
received.

Steady off No data is being

transmitted or
received.

Green (LINK) Steady on The connection is set

up successfully.

Steady off No connection is set

up.

FE/GE0 to FE/GE1 Green (LINK) Steady on The connection is set

up successfully.

Steady off No connection is set

up.

Orange (ACT) Blinking Data is being

transmitted or
received.

Steady off No data is being

transmitted or
received.

Ports
Table 3-66 describes the ports on the panel of the LMPT.

Table 3-66 Ports on the panel of the LMPT

Silkscreen Connector Quantity Description

SFP0 and SFP1 SFP female 2 FE/GE optical port

connector connecting to the
transmission
equipment or gateway
equipment

ETH(1) RJ45 connector 1 Local maintenance and

commissioning port

TST(2) USB connector 1 Port for clock signal

outputs

USB(3) USB connector 1 Software loading

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 124

Silkscreen Connector Quantity Description

FE/GE0 to FE/GE1 RJ45 connector 2 FE/GE electrical port

connecting to the
transmission
equipment or gateway
equipment

GPS SMA connector 1 GPS port

RST - 1 Used for resetting the

LMPT

NOTE

SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on the LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, they are not used
simultaneously.
SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, they cannot be used
simultaneously.

3.3.9 WBBP
The WCDMA baseband processing unit (WBBP) in the BBU3900 processes baseband signals.

NOTE
WBBPf is supported in NodeB V200R014C00SPC320 and later versions.

Specifications
The WBBP falls into four types, as listed in Table 3-67.
NOTE
The WBBP in slot 2 or slot 3 could transfer the received CPRI data to other boards.

Table 3-67 WBBP specifications

Board Number Number Number Number Number Number

of Cells of UL of DL of of of
CEs CEs HSDPA HSDPA HSUPA
Codesa UEs UEs

WBBPa 3 128 256 3x15 96 60

WBBPb1 3 64 64 3x15 64 64

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 125

Board Number Number Number Number Number Number

of Cells of UL of DL of of of
CEs CEs HSDPA HSDPA HSUPA
Codesa UEs UEs

WBBPb2 3 128 128 3x15 128 96

WBBPb3 6 256 256 6x15 144 96

WBBPb4 6 384 384 6x15 144 96

WBBPd1 6 64 64 6x15 128 96

192 192

WBBPd2 6 256 256 6x15 144 144

384 384

WBBPd3 6 256 256 6x15 144 96

WBBPf1 6 64 128 6x15 144 144

192 256

WBBPf2 6 256 384 6x15 192 192

WBBPf3 6 256 384 6x15 256 256

384 512

WBBPf4 6 512 768 6x15 384 384

a: The number of HSDPA codes supported by a WBBPd1 is 6x15, where "6" is the number
of cells and "15" is the number of codes supported by each cell.

NOTE
For combined signaling specifications of the WBBP, see section "Signaling Specifications" in 3900 Series
Base Station Technical Description.

Panel
The WBBP has four types of panels, as shown in Figure 3-47, Figure 3-48, Figure 3-49, and
Figure 3-50.

Figure 3-47 Panel of the WBBPa

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 126

Figure 3-48 Panel of the WBBPb

Figure 3-49 Panel of the WBBPd

Figure 3-50 Panel of the WBBPf

NOTE

l The WBBPb1, WBBPb2, WBBPb3, and WBBPb4 have silkscreens WBBPb1, WBBPb2,
WBBPb3, and WBBPb4 indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel,
respectively.
l The WBBPd1, WBBPd2, and WBBPd3 have silkscreens WBBPd1, WBBPd2, and WBBPd3
indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.
l The WBBPf1, WBBPf2, WBBPf3, and WBBPf4 have silkscreens WBBPf1, WBBPf2, WBBPf3, and
WBBPf4 indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.

Functions
The WBBP performs the following functions:
l Provides CPRI ports for communication with RF modules, and supports CPRI ports in 1
+1 backup mode.
l Processes uplink and downlink baseband signals.
l The WBBPd supports interference cancellation (IC) within the board.
l When the WBBPd is installed in slot 2 or 3 and is connected to an RF module, the WBBPd
supports the IC of uplink data.
l The WBBPf installed in slot 2 or slot 3 supports the baseband interconnection between
BBUs.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 127

Indicators
There are three indicators on the panel of the WBBP. Table 3-68 describes the indicators on the
WBBP and their status.

Table 3-68 Indicators on the panel of the WBBP and their status

Silkscreen Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is power supply, but the

board is faulty.

Steady off There is no power supply, or the

board is faulty.

On for 1s and off for 1s The board is functioning

properly.

On for 0.125s and off for l Software or data is being

0.125s loaded to the board.
l The board is not started.

ALM Red Steady on An alarm is generated, and the

board must be replaced.

Steady off The board is running properly.

On for 1s and off for 1s An alarm is generated and you

need to locate the fault before
deciding whether to replace the
board.

ACT Green Steady on The board serves as an active

board.

Steady off l The board does not serve as

an active board.
l The board has not been
activated.
l The board is not providing
any services.

On for 1s and off for 1s The power supply for the board
is insufficient.
NOTE
Of all types of WBBP boards, only
the WBBPf has this status.

The WBBPa or WBBPb provides three indicators indicating the status of Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP) links, and the indicators are below the SFP ports. The WBBPd or WBBPf
provides six indicators indicating the status of SFP links, and the indicators are above the SFP
ports.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 128

Table 3-69 describes the indicators.

Table 3-69 CPRI port status indicators

Silkscreen Color Status Description

CPRIx Red or green Steady green The CPRI link is

functioning properly.

Steady red An optical module

fails to receive or
transmit signals
because of the
following reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.

Blinking red (on for The RF module

0.125s and off for connected to the CPRI
0.125s) link has a hardware
fault.

Steady off l The optical

module cannot be
detected.
l The CPRI cable is
not connected.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 129

NOTE
(1) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption. The TST port is used for commissioning the
base station rather than importing or exporting the base station configuration.

The WBBPf provides an indicator indicating the status of the Quad Small Form-factor Pluggable
(QSFP) link, and the indicator is above the QSFP port. Table 3-70 describes this indicator.

Table 3-70 QSFP port status indicators

Silkscreen Color Status Description

HEI Red or green Steady green The inter-BBU

transmission link is
functional.

Steady red An optical module

fails to receive or
transmit signals
because of the
following reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.

Blinking red (on for The interconnection

1s and off for 1s) link is out of lock
because of the
following reasons:
l There is no
mutual lock
between two
interconnected
BBUs.
l There is
mismatched data
rate over QSFP
ports.

Steady off The optical module

cannot be detected.

Ports
Table 3-71 describes the three CPRI ports on the panel of the WBBPa and WBBPb.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 130

Table 3-71 Ports on the WBBPa and WBBPb panels

Silkscreen Connector Description

CPRIx SFP female connector Data transmission port

interconnected to the RF
module. It supports the input
and output of optical and
electrical transmission
signals.

Table 3-72 describes the six CPRI ports on the panel of the WBBPd.

Table 3-72 Ports on the WBBPd panel

Silkscreen Connector Description

CPRI0, CPRI1, SFP female connector Data transmission port

CPRI2, CPRI3/ interconnected to the RF module.
EIH0, CPRI4/EIH1, It supports the input and output of
CPRI5/EIH2 optical and electrical
transmission signals.

The WBBPf provides six CPRI ports and one HEI port, as listed in Table 3-73.

Table 3-73 Ports on the WBBPf panel

Silkscreen Connector Description

CPRIx SFP female connector Data transmission port

interconnected to the RF
module. It supports the input
and output of optical and
electrical transmission
signals.

HEI QSFP connector Port interconnected to other

baseband boards to share the
baseband resources.

3.3.10 LBBP
The LTE baseband processing unit (LBBP) in the BBU3900 processes baseband signals.

Specifications
The following table lists the signaling specifications of the LBBP in LTE FDD scenarios.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 131

Table 3-74 Signaling specifications of the LBBP

Board Signaling Specifications (BHCA)

LBBPc 40000

LBBPd1, LBBPd2, or LBBPd3 50000

Table 3-75 Signaling specifications of the LBBP

Board Signaling Specifications (BHCA)

LBBPc 60000

LBBPd1, LBBPd2, or LBBPd3 80000

The following table lists the maximum number of UEs in RRC connected mode supported by
the LBBP board in LTE FDD scenarios.

Table 3-76 Maximum number of UEs in RRC connected mode

Board Cell Bandwidth Maximum Number of UEs in

RRC Connected Mode

LBBPc 1.4 MHz 1008

3 MHz 1800

5 MHz 1800

10 MHz 1800

15 MHz 1800 (in 2R mode) or 1200 (in 4R

mode)

20 MHz 1800 (in 2R mode) or 1200 (in 4R

mode)

LBBPd1 or LBBPd2 1.4 MHz 300

3 MHz 1080

5 MHz 1800

10 MHz 3600

15 MHz 3600

20 MHz 3600

LBBPd3 1.4 MHz 600

3 MHz 2160

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 132

Board Cell Bandwidth Maximum Number of UEs in

RRC Connected Mode

5 MHz 3600

10 MHz 3600

15 MHz 3600

20 MHz 3600

The following table lists the maximum number of UEs in RRC connected mode supported by
the LBBP board in LTE TDD scenarios.

Table 3-77 Maximum Number of UEs in RRC connected mode

Board Cell Bandwidth Maximum Number of

UEs in RRC Connected
Mode

LBBPc 5MHz 1800

10MHz 1800

20MHz 1800(2R)/1200(4R)

LBBPd1 10MHz 3600

20MHz 3600

LBBPd2 5 MHz 1800

10 MHz 3600

15 MHz 3600

20 MHz 3600

LBBPd4 10 MHz 3600

20 MHz 3600

Table 3-78 Maximum Number of UEs in RRC connected mode

Board Cell Bandwidth Maximum Number of

UEs in RRC Connected
Mode

LBBPd1 10MHz 3600

20MHz 3600

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 133

Board Cell Bandwidth Maximum Number of

UEs in RRC Connected
Mode

LBBPd3 10 MHz 3600

20 MHz 3600

The maximum number of data radio bearers (DRBs) supported by an LBBP is three times the
maximum number of UEs in RRC connected mode.

NOTE
For the overall signaling specifications of an eNodeB, see section "Signaling Specifications" in 3900 Series
Base Station Technical Description. For the data radio bearer (DRB) and maximum number of UEs in
RRC_CONNECTED mode, see section "Baseband Specifications" in 3900 Series Base Station Technical
Description.

The following table lists the maximum throughput of the LBBP.

Table 3-79 Maximum throughput of the LBBP

Board Maximum Throughput

LBBPc l Downlink: 300 Mbit/s

l Uplink: 100 Mbit/s

LBBPd1 l Downlink: 450 Mbit/s

l Uplink: 225 Mbit/s

LBBPd2 l Downlink: 600 Mbit/s

l Uplink: 225 Mbit/s

LBBPd3 LTE FDD:

l Downlink: 600 Mbit/s
l Uplink: 300 Mbit/s
LTE TDD:
l Downlink: 600 Mbit/s
l Uplink: 225 Mbit/s

LBBPd4 l Downlink: 600 Mbit/s

l Uplink: 225 Mbit/s

NOTE
The maximum throughput listed in the preceding table is the hardware capacities supported by the LBBPc
and LBBPd boards in LTE TDD scenarios. The actual uplink and downlink peak throughput depends on
uplink-downlink subframe configurations.

The following table lists the number of cells, bandwidth, and antenna configurations supported
by a single LBBP in LTE FDD scenarios.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 134

Table 3-80 Specifications of the LBBP in LTE FDD scenarios

Board Number of Cell Bandwidth Antenna Configuration

Cell

LBBPc 3 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 3x20 MHz 1T1R

MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz 3x20 MHz 1T2R
3x10 MHz 4T4R
3x20 MHz 2T2R
1x20 MHz 4T4R

LBBPd1 3 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 3x20 MHz 1T1R

MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz 3x20 MHz 1T2R
3x20 MHz 2T2R

LBBPd2 3 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 3x20 MHz 1T1R

MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz 3x20 MHz 1T2R
3x20 MHz 2T2R
3x20 MHz 4T4R

LBBPd3 6 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, and 6x10M 1T1R

10 MHz 6x10M 1T2R
6x10M 2T2R

The following table lists the number of cells, bandwidth, and antenna configurations supported
by a single LBBP in LTE TDD scenarios.

Table 3-81 Specifications of the LBBP in LTE TDD scenarios

Board Number of Cell Bandwidth Antenna Configuration

Cells

LBBPc 3 5 MHz, 10 MHz, or 20 MHz 1x20 MHz (4T4R)

3x10M 2T2R
3x20 MHz 2T2R
3x10 MHz 4T4R

LBBPd2 3 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 3x20 MHz 2T2R

20 MHz 3x20 MHz 4T4R

LBBPd4 3 10 MHz or 20 MHz 3x20 MHz (8T8R)

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 135

Table 3-82 Specifications of the LBBP in LTE TDD scenarios

Board Number of Cells Cell Bandwidth Antenna

Configuration

LBBPd1 3 10M/20M 3x20M 2T2R

LBBPd3 6 10 MHz or 20 MHz 6x20 MHz 2T2R

3x20 MHz 8T8R

NOTE

l "Antenna Configuration" lists the maximum configurations supported by various types of a baseband
processing board. For example, the LBBPc supports the maximum configuration of 3x10 MHz 4T4R,
and therefore supports any of the following configurations: 3x1.4 MHz 4T4R, 3x3 MHz 4T4R, and
3x5 MHz 4T4R.
l As long as the maximum antenna configuration is not exceeded, different cells support different antenna
configurations. For example, if an LBBPd2 supports the 3x20 MHz 2T2R antenna configuration, the
three cells connected to the LBBPc can use the following antenna configurations: 2T2R, 2T2R, and
1T1R.
l Boards with the same antenna configuration support combinations of different bandwidth as long as
the total bandwidth does not exceed the maximum bandwidth supported by the board. For example, if
an LBBPc supports the 3x20 MHz 2T2R antenna configuration, the three cells connected to the LBBPc
can use any of the following antenna configurations: 1.4 MHz 2T2R, 3 MHz 2T2R, 5 MHz 2T2R, 10
MHz 2T2R, 15 MHz 2T2R, and 20 MHz 2T2R.
l The LBBP supports CPRI convergence when the site is configured with any of the following RF
modules: RRU3221, RRU3240, RRU3828, RRU3829, RRU3928, RRU3929, LRFUe, MRFUd,
RRU3229, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3642, RRU3832, RRU3838, and RRU3268. The CPRI
convergence of the LBBP must comply with the following principles:
l In LBBPc+LBBPc CPRI convergence mode, the CPRI convergence is allowed only between two
LBBPc boards, and one LBBPc board must be configured in slot 2 or 3.
l In LBBPc+LBBPc CPRI convergence mode, the CPRI convergence is allowed only from multiple
LBBPc boards to one LBBPd board, and only the CPRI ports on the LBBPd in slot 2 or 3 can
connect to RF units.
l in LTE TDD scenarios, the LBBPc cannot serve as a converging board and only can be a converged
board.

Panel
The LBBP has two types of panels, as shown in Figure 3-51 and Figure 3-52.

Figure 3-51 LBBPc panel

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 136

Figure 3-52 LBBPd panel

NOTE
The LBBPd1, LBBPd2, LBBPd3, and LBBPd4 have silkscreens LBBPd1, LBBPd2, LBBPd3, and
LBBPd4 indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.

Functions
The LBBP performs the following functions:
l Processes uplink and downlink baseband signals.
l Provides CPRI ports for communication with RF modules.

Indicators
On the LBBP panel, there are three indicators, as described in Table 3-83.

Table 3-83 Indicators on the LBBP panel

Silkscreen Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is power supply, but the

board is faulty.

Steady off There is no power supply, or the

board is faulty.

On for 1s and off for 1s The board is functioning

properly.

On for 0.125s and off for l The board is being loaded or

0.125s configured.
l The board is not started.

ALM Red Steady on An alarm is generated, and the

board must be replaced.

Steady off The board is running properly.

On for 1s and off for 1s An alarm is generated, and you

need to locate the fault before
deciding whether to replace the
board.

ACT Green Steady on The board serves as an active

board.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 137

Silkscreen Color Status Description

Steady off l The board does not serve as

an active board.
l The board is not activated.
l The board does not provide
any services.

On for 1s and off for 1s The power supply for the board
is insufficient.
NOTE
Of all types of LBBP boards, only
the LBBPd has this status.

As listed in Table 3-84, the LBBP provides six indicators indicating the Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP) link status. The indicators are positioned above the SFP ports.

Table 3-84 SFP link status indicators

Silkscreen Color Status Description

CPRIx Red or green Steady green The CPRI link is

functioning properly.

Steady red An optical module

fails to receive or
transmit signals
because of the
following reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.

Blinking red (on for The RF module

0.125s and off for connected to the CPRI
0.125s) link has a hardware
fault.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 138

Silkscreen Color Status Description

Steady off l The optical

module cannot be
detected.
l The CPRI cable is
not connected.

The LBBPd provides an indicator that indicates the Quad Small Form-factor Pluggable (QSFP)
link status. The indicator is above the QSFP port. Table 3-85 describes the indicator.

Table 3-85 QSFP link status indicator

Silkscreen Color Status Description

HEI Red or green Steady green The inter-BBU

transmission link is
functional.

Steady red An optical module

fails to receive or
transmit signals
because of the
following reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 139

Silkscreen Color Status Description

Blinking red (on for The interconnection

1s and off for 1s) link is out of lock
because of the
following reasons:
l There is no
mutual lock
between two
interconnected
BBUs.
l The data rates of
the QSFP ports do
not match each
other.

Steady off The optical module

cannot be detected.

Ports
Table 3-86 describes the six CPRI ports on the LBBP panel.

Table 3-86 LBBP ports

Silkscreen Connector Quantity Description

CPRI0 to CPRI5 SFP female 6 Connected to the RF

connector modules for
transmitting service
data, clock signals,
and synchronization
information.

Table 3-87 describes the QSFP port on the LBBPd panel.

Table 3-87 QSFP port on the LBBPd panel

Silkscreen Connector Quantity Description

HEI QSFP connector 1 Reserved

3.3.11 FAN
The FAN unit for the BBU3900 controls the speed of fans and monitors the temperature of the
fan unit. It reports the status of the fans and fan unit, and dissipates heat from the BBU.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 140

Panel
The FAN units fall into two types: FAN and FANc, as shown in Figure 3-53 and Figure 3-54.

Figure 3-53 FAN

Figure 3-54 FANc

NOTE
There is a FANc silkscreen on the FANc while the FAN has no such silkscreen.

Functions
The FAN unit performs the following functions:

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 141

l Controls the fan speed.

l Reports the status, temperature, and in-position signal of the fans to the main control
processing unit.
l Monitors the temperature at the air intake vent.
l Dissipates heat.
l The FANc provides a read-write electronic label.

Indicator
There is only one indicator on the panel of the FAN unit, which indicates the operating status
of the fans. Table 3-88 describes the indicator.

Table 3-88 Indicator on the panel of the FAN unit

Silkscreen Color Status Description

STATE Red or green Blinking green (on The module is not

for 0.125s and off for registered, and no
0.125s) alarm is reported.

Blinking green (on The module is

for 1s and off for 1s) working.

Blinking red (on for The module is

1s and off for 1s) reporting alarms.

Steady off There is no power

supply.

3.3.12 UPEU
The universal power and environment interface unit (UPEU) for the BBU3900 converts -48 V
DC or +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power.

Panel
The UPEU is classified into four types: universal power and environment interface unit type a
(UPEUa), universal power and environment interface unit type b (UPEUb), universal power and
environment interface unit type c (UPEUc), and universal power and environment interface unit
type d (UPEUd). The UPEUa, UPEUc, and UPEUd convert -48 V DC power into +12 V DC
power, and the UPEUb converts +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power. Figure 3-55, Figure
3-56, Figure 3-57, and Figure 3-58 show the panels of the UPEUa, UPEUb, UPEUc, and
UPEUd, respectively.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 142

Figure 3-55 UPEUa panel

(1) BBU power switch (2) 7W2 connector

Figure 3-56 UPEUb panel

(1) BBU power switch (2) 7W2 connector

Figure 3-57 UPEUc panel

(1) BBU power switch (2) 3V3 connector

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 143

Figure 3-58 UPEUd panel

(1) BBU power switch (2) 3V3 connector

NOTE
The UPEUc and UPEUd have silkscreens "UPEUc" and "UPEUd" indicating their board types on them,
respectively, whereas the UPEUa and UPEUb do not have such silkscreens indicating their board types.
The UPEUa and UPEUb, however, can be distinguished by the silkscreens "-48 V" and "+24 V" on them.

Functions
The UPEU performs the following functions:
l Converts -48 V DC or +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power, which is the operating
voltage of the boards.
l Provides two ports with each receiving one RS485 signal and another two ports with each
receiving four Boolean signals. The Boolean signals can only be dry contact or Open
Collector (OC) signals.

Table 3-89 describes the specifications.

Table 3-89 Specifications

Board Output Power Backup Mode

UPEUa The output power of a 1+1 backup

UPEUa is 300 W.

UPEUc The output power of a 1+1 backup

UPEUc is 360 W, and the
output power of two UPEUc
boards is 650 W.

UPEUd The output power of a 1+1 backup

UPEUd is 650 W.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 144

NOTE
A BBU cannot house two UPEUs of different types. When the power required by the BBU exceeds the
power specification of the BBU:
l If the BBU has been configured with one or two UPEUa boards, replace the boards with two UPEUc
boards.
l If the BBU has been configured with one UPEUc board, add a second UPEUc board.

Indicator
The UPEU has one indicator, which indicates the operating status of the UPEU. Table 3-90
describes the indicator.

Table 3-90 Indicator on the UPEU panel

Silkscreen Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on The board is

functional.

Steady off There is no power

supply, or the board
is faulty.

Port
The UPEU provides two RS485 signal ports, each receiving one RS485 signal, and two Boolean
signal ports, each receiving four Boolean signals. Figure 3-59 shows the slots in the BBU.

Figure 3-59 Slots in the BBU

Table 3-91 describes the ports on the UPEU panel.

Table 3-91 Description on the ports

Slot Silkscree Connecto Quantity Description

n r

Slot 19 +24 V or 3V3 or 1 Introducing +24 V or -48 V DC power

-48 V 7W2
connector

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 145

Slot Silkscree Connecto Quantity Description

n r

EXT- RJ45 1 Port for Boolean inputs 0 to 3

ALM0 connector

EXT- RJ45 1 Port for Boolean inputs 4 to 7

ALM1 connector

MON0 RJ45 1 Port for RS485 input 0

connector

MON1 RJ45 1 Port for RS485 input 1

connector

Slot 18 +24 V or 3V3 or 1 Introducing +24 V or -48 V DC power

-48 V 7W2
connector

EXT- RJ45 1 Port for Boolean inputs 0 to 3

ALM0 connector

EXT- RJ45 1 Port for Boolean inputs 4 to 7

ALM1 connector

MON0 RJ45 1 Port for RS485 input 0

connector

MON1 RJ45 1 Port for RS485 input 1

connector

3.3.13 UEIU
The universal environment interface unit (UEIU) of the BBU3900 transmits monitoring signals
and alarm signals from external devices to the main control board.

Panel
Figure 3-60 shows the panel of the UEIU.

Figure 3-60 Panel of the UEIU

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 146

Functions
The UEIU performs the following functions:
l Provides two ports with each receiving one path of RS485 signal.
l Provides two ports with each receiving four paths of Boolean signals. The Boolean signals
can only be dry contact or OC signals.
l Transmits monitoring signals and alarm signals from external devices to the main control
board.

Port
The UEIU is configured in slot 18 and provides two RS485 signal ports, each transmitting one
path of RS485 signals, and two Boolean signal ports, each transmitting four paths of Boolean
signals.

Table 3-92 describes the ports on the panel of the UEIU.

Table 3-92 Ports on the panel of the UEIU

Slot Silkscre Connect Quanti Description

en or ty

Slot 18 EXT- RJ45 1 Port for Boolean inputs 0 to 3

ALM0 connector

EXT- RJ45 1 Port for Boolean inputs 4 to 7

ALM1 connector

MON0 RJ45 1 Port for RS485 input 0

connector

MON1 RJ45 1 Port for RS485 input 1

connector

3.3.14 USCU
This section describes the universal satellite card and clock unit (USCU).

Specifications
The USCU falls into three types, as shown in Table 3-93.

Table 3-93 Specifications of the USCU

Board Supported Mode Supported Satellite Card

USCUb11 LTE N/A

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 147

Board Supported Mode Supported Satellite Card

USCUb14 GSM UBLOX single-satellite card

UMTS
LTE

USCUb22 GSM Naviors dual-satellite card

UMTS
LTE

Panel
There are two types of USCU, as shown in Figure 3-61 and Figure 3-62.
NOTE
On the lower left side of the USCUb11 and USCUb14, there are silkscreens USCUb11 and USCUb14,
respectively, indicating their board types.

Figure 3-61 USCUb11 and USCUb14 panel

Figure 3-62 USCUb22 panel

Functions
The USCU has the following functions:

l The USCUb11 provides ports to communicate with the RGPS (for example the reused
equipment of the customer) and BITS equipment. It does not support GPS signals.
l The USCUb14 contains a UBLOX satelliate card, which does not support RGPS signals.
l The USCUb22 does not support RGPS signals. It uses a Naviors satellite card, which must
be purchased locally and installed onsite.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 148

Indicators
Table 3-94 and Table 3-95 describe the indicators on the USCU.

Table 3-94 Indicators on the USCU

Silkscreen Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is power

supply, but the board
is faulty.

Steady off There is no power

supply, or the board
is faulty.

On for 1s and off for The board is

1s functioning properly.

On for 0.125s and off l The board is

for 0.125s being loaded or
configured.
l The board is not
started.

ALM Red Steady on An alarm is

generated, and the
board needs to be
replaced.

Steady off The board is running

properly.

On for 1s and off for An alarm is

1s generated and you
need to locate the
fault before deciding
whether to replace
the board.

ACT Green Steady on The board serves as

an active board.

Steady off l The board does

not serve as an
active board.
l The board has not
been activated.
l The board is not
providing any
services.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 149

Table 3-95 Indicators for the TOD ports

Color Status Description

Green (on the left) The green indicator is steady The TOD port is configured as
on and the orange indicator is an input port.
steady off.

Orange (on the right) The orange indicator is steady The TOD port is configured as
on and the green indicator is an output port.
steady off.

Ports
Table 3-96 describes the ports on the USCU.

Table 3-96 Ports on the USCU

Silkscreen Connector Description

GPS SMA connector The GPS ports on the USCUb14 and USCUb22
receive GPS signals.
The GPS port on the USCUb11 is reserved and
cannot receive GPS signals.

RGPS port PCB welded The RGPS port on the USCUb11 receives RGPS
wiring terminal signals.
The RGPS ports on the USCUb14 and USCUb22 are
reserved and cannot receive RGPS signals.

TOD0 port RJ45 connector This port receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals.

TOD1 port RJ45 connector This port receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals,
and receives TOD signals from the M1000.

BITS port SMA connector This port receives BITS clock signals, supports
adaptive input of 2.048 MHz and 10 MHz clock
reference source.

M-1PPS port SMA connector This port receives 1PPS signals from the M1000.

3.3.15 UTRP
The universal transmission processing unit (UTRP) is an extended transmission board in the
BBU3900 and provides ports connecting to transmission equipment.

Specifications
Table 3-97 describes the specifications of the UTRP.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 150

Table 3-97 Specifications of the UTRP

Board Sub- Supporte Transmis Number Port Full/

board/ d Mode sion of ports Capacity Half-
Board Mode Duplex
Type

UTRP2 UEOC UMTS Transmiss 2 10 Mbit/s, Full-

ion over 100 Mbit/ duplex
FE/GE s, and
optical 1000
ports Mbit/s

UTRP3 UAEC UMTS ATM over 2 Eight Full-

E1/T1 channels duplex

UTRP4 UIEC UMTS IP over E1/ 2 Eight Full-

T1 channels duplex

UTRPb4 Without a GSM TDM over 2 Eight Full-

sub-board E1/T1 channels duplex

UTRP6 UUAS UMTS STM-1/ 1 One Full-

OC-3 channel duplex

UTRP9 UQEC UMTS Transmiss 4 10 Mbit/s, Full-

ion over 100 Mbit/ duplex
FE/GE s, and
electrical 1000
ports Mbit/s

UTRPa Without a UMTS ATM over 2 Eight Full-

sub-board E1/T1 or channels duplex
IP over E1/
T1

UTRPc Without a GSM Transmiss 4 10 Mbit/s, Full-

sub-board UMTS ion over 100 Mbit/ duplex
FE/GE s, and
LTE electrical 1000
ports Mbit/s

Transmiss 2 100 Mbit/s Full-

ion over and 1000 duplex
FE/GE Mbit/s
optical
ports

Panel
Figure 3-63 shows the panel of the UTRP2.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 151

Figure 3-63 Panel of the UTRP2 (with two optical ports)

Figure 3-64 shows the panel of the UTRP3 and UTRP4.

Figure 3-64 Panel of the UTRP3 and UTRP4 (with eight E1/T1 channels)

Figure 3-65 shows the panel of the UTRPb4 in GSM mode.

Figure 3-65 Panel of the UTRP4 (with eight E1/T1 channels)

Figure 3-66 shows the panel of the UTRP6.

Figure 3-66 Panel of the UTRP6 (with one STM-1 channel)

Figure 3-67 shows the panel of the UTRP9.

Figure 3-67 Panel of the UTRP9 (with four electrical ports)

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 152

The following figure shows the UTRPa panel.

Figure 3-68 UTRPa panel (with eight E1/T1 channels)

Figure 3-69 shows the panel of the UTRPc.

Figure 3-69 Panel of the UTRPc (with four electrical ports and two optical ports)

Functions
The UTRP performs the following functions:

l Provides extended E1/T1 ports to connect to transmission equipment, supporting ATM,

TDM, and IP transmission.
l Provides electrical and optical transmission ports to connect to transmission equipment.
l Supports cold backup.

Restriction
The GTMUa cannot be used together with the UTRPc.

Indicators
Table 3-98 describes the indicators on the UTRP panel.

Table 3-98 Indicators on the UTRP panel

Silkscreen Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is power

supply, but the board
is faulty.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 153

Silkscreen Color Status Description

Steady off There is no power

supply, or the board
is faulty.

On for 1s and off for The board is running

1s properly.

On for 0.125s and off l The board is

for 0.125s being loaded or
configured.
l The board is not
started.

ALM Red Steady on An alarm is

generated, and the
board needs to be
replaced.

Steady off The board is running

properly.

On for 1s and off for An alarm is

1s generated and you
need to locate the
fault before deciding
whether to replace
the board.

ACT Green Steady on The board serves as

an active board.

Steady off l The board does

not serve as an
active board.
l The board has not
been activated.
l The board is not
providing any
services.

The ACT indicator on the UTRP board in GSM mode has different status from the ACT indicator
on other boards, as listed in Table 3-99.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 154

Table 3-99 Status of the ACT indicator on the UTRP board in GSM mode

Silkscreen Color Status Description

ACT Green Steady on l Before the

configuration
takes effect, none
or both of the two
E1 ports in GSM
mode are
functional.
l The
configuration has
taken effect.

On for 0.125s and off Before the

for 0.125s configuration takes
effect, only one E1
port in GSM mode is
functional.

Each Ethernet port on the UTRP2, UTRP9, and UTRPc corresponds to two indicators indicating
the status of the current link, as listed in Table 3-100.

Table 3-100 Status of the indicators for Ethernet ports on the UTRP2, UTRP9, and UTRPc

Silkscreen Color Status Description

LINK Green Steady on The link is connected

properly.

Steady off The link is not

connected properly.

ACT Orange Blinking Data is being

transmitted or
received on the link.

Steady off No data is being

transmitted or
received on the link.

There are three indicators on the UTRPc: R0, R1, and R2, of which the status is listed in Table
3-101.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 155

Table 3-101 Status of indicators on the UTRPc

Silkscreen Color Status Description

R0 Red or green Steady off The board is not

working in GSM
mode.

Steady green The board is working

in GSM mode.

Steady red Reserved

R1 Red or green Steady off The board is not

working in UMTS
mode.

Steady green The board is working

in UMTS mode.

Steady red Reserved

R2 Red or green Steady off The board is not

working in LTE
mode.

Steady green The board is working

in LTE mode.

Steady red Reserved

NOTE
If multiple indicators are on at the same time, the board works in multiple modes.

Ports
Table 3-102 describes the ports on the UTRP2.

Table 3-102 Ports on the panel of the UTRP2 (with 2 optical ports)

Silkscreen Port Type Quantity Connector

FE/GE0 and FE/GE1 FE/GE optical port 2 SFP female

connector

The UTRP3, UTRP4, UTRPa, and UTRPb4 have the same ports, as listed in Table 3-103.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 156

Table 3-103 Ports on the panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4, UTRPa, and UTRPb4 (with 8 E1/T1
ports)

Silkscreen Port Type Quantity Connector

E1/T1 E1/T1 port 2 DB26 female

connector

Table 3-104 lists the ports on the UTRP6.

Table 3-104 Ports on the panel of the UTRP6 (with one STM-1 channel)

Silkscreen Port Type Quantity Connector

STM-1/OC-3 STM-1/OC-3 1 SFP female

connector

Table 3-105 lists the ports on the UTRP9.

Table 3-105 Ports on the panel of the UTRP9 (with four electrical ports)

Silkscreen Port Type Quantity Connector

FE/GE0 to FE/GE3 FE/GE electrical port 4 RJ45 connector

Table 3-106 describes the ports on the panel of the UTRPc.

Table 3-106 Ports on the panel of the UTRPc (with four electrical ports and two optical ports)

Silkscreen Port Type Quantity Connector

FE/GE0 and FE/GE1 FE/GE optical port 2 SFP female

connector

FE/GE2 to FE/GE5 FE/GE electrical port 4 RJ45 connector

DIP Switch
There is no DIP switch on the UTRP2, UTRP6, and UTRP9.

There are three DIP switches on the UTRP3, UTRP4, UTRPa, and UTRPb4. SW1 and SW2 are
used to set whether to ground the receiver end of the E1 cable, and SW3 is used to set the
resistance of the E1 cable. Figure 3-70 shows the DIP switches on the UTRP3 and UTRP4.
Figure 3-71 shows the DIP switches on the UTRPb4. Figure 3-72 shows the DIP switches on
the UTRPa.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 157

Figure 3-70 DIP switches on the UTRP3 and UTRP4

Figure 3-71 DIP switches on the UTRPb4

Figure 3-72 DIP switches on the UTRPa

Table 3-107, Table 3-108, and Table 3-109 list the settings of the DIP switches on the UTRP.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 158

Table 3-107 Settings of SW1 on the UTRP

DIP DIP Setting Description

Switch
1 2 3 4

SW1 OFF OFF OFF OFF Balanced

ON ON ON ON Imbalanced

Others Unavailable

Table 3-108 Settings of SW2 on the UTRP

DIP DIP Setting Description

Switch
1 2 3 4

SW2 OFF OFF OFF OFF Balanced

ON ON ON ON Imbalanced

Others Unavailable

NOTICE
SW1 and SW2 are set to OFF by default. SW1 corresponds to No.4 to No.7 E1 channels. SW2
corresponds to No.0 to No.3 E1 channels.

Table 3-109 Settings of SW3 on the UTRP

DIP DIP Setting Description

Switch
1 2 3 4

SW3 OFF OFF ON ON T1

ON ON OFF OFF The E1

resistance is
set to 120
ohm.

ON ON ON ON The E1
resistance is
set to 75 ohm.

Others Unavailable

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 159

3.3.16 UBRI
The universal baseband radio interface board (UBRI) provides extended CPRI optical or
electrical ports to implement convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on the
CPRI.

Panel
Figure 3-73 shows the panel of the UBRI.

Figure 3-73 UBRI panel

Functions
The UBRI performs the following functions:
l Provides extended CPRI electrical or optical ports.
l Performs convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on the CPRI.

Indicators
Table 3-110 describes the indicators on the UBRI panel.

Table 3-110 Indicators on the UBRI panel

Silkscreen Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is power supply, but the

board is faulty.

Steady off There is no power supply, or the

board is faulty.

On for 1s and off for 1s The board is running properly.

On for 0.125s and off for Software is being loaded to the

0.125s board.

ALM Red Steady on An alarm is generated on the

board.

Steady off The board is running properly.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 160

Silkscreen Color Status Description

On for 1s and off for 1s An alarm is generated and you

need to locate the fault before
deciding whether to replace the
board.

ACT Green Steady on The board serves as an active

board.

Steady off l The board does not serve as

an active board.
l The board has not been
activated.
l The board is not providing
any services.

The UBRI provides six indicators indicating the status of the CRRI links. The indicators are
above the SFP ports. Table 3-111 describes the indicators.

Table 3-111 CPRI port status indicators

Silkscreen Color Status Description

CPRIx Red or green Steady green The CPRI link is

functioning properly.

Steady red An optical module

fails to receive signals
because of the
following reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 161

Silkscreen Color Status Description

Steady off l The optical

module cannot be
detected.
l The CPRI cable is
not connected.

Ports
Table 3-112 describes the ports on the UBRI panel.

Table 3-112 Ports on the UBRI panel

Silkscreen Connector Quantity Description

CPRI0 to CPRI5 SFP female 6 Connecting the BBU

connector and the RF module

The following table lists the specifications of the CPRI ports on the UBRI.

Table 3-113 Specifications of the CPRI ports on the UBRI

Board CPRI Port CPRI Port Data Topology Type

Quantity Rate (Gbit/s)

UBRI 6 1.25/2.5 Star, chain, and ring

topologies

3.3.17 UCIU
The universal inter-connection infrastructure unit (UCIU) interconnects BBUs. It forwards
control and synchronization information from one BBU to another.

Panel
Figure 3-74 shows the UCIU panel.

Figure 3-74 UCIU panel

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 162

Functions
The UCIU performs the following functions:

l Supports single- or multi-mode configuration and management. When in multi-mode, it is

shared by multiple modes and can be configured and managed by any mode.
l Interconnects BBUs and forwards control and synchronization information from one BBU
to another.
l Supports co-site of a 3900 series base station and a 3012 series base station.
l Supports the connection to a UMPT using a fiber optic cable.

Indicators
A UCIU provides one DB15 port, three running indicators, and six SFP+ ports for
interconnection, with one double-colored indicator on each port. Table 3-114 describes the
indicators on the UCIU panel.

Table 3-114 Indicators on the UCIU panel

Silkscreen Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is power supply, but the

board is faulty.

Steady off There is no power supply, or the

board is faulty.

On for 1s and off for The board is running properly.

On for 0.125s and off l The board is being loaded or

for 0.125s configured.
l The board is not started.

ALM Red Steady on An alarm is generated, and the

board must be replaced.

Steady off There is no fault.

On for 1s and off for An alarm is generated and you

1s need to locate the fault before
deciding whether to replace the
board.

ACT Green Steady on The board serves as an active

board.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 163

Silkscreen Color Status Description

Steady off l The board does not serve as

an active board.
l The board has not been
activated.
l The board is not providing
any services.

M0 to M4 Red or green Steady green The inter-BBU transmission

and S0 link is normal.

Steady red The optical module fails to

transmit or receive signals, or
the fiber optic cable is faulty.

Blinking red (on for Cables are connected in an

0.125s and off for incorrect manner. For example:
0.125s) l In the UCIU+UMPT
scenario, the S0 port on the
UCIU is connected to the CI
port on the UMPT.
Indicators for the S0 and CI
ports are blinking.
l The ports are connected in
ring topology. Indicators for
all incorrectly connected
ports are blinking.

Steady off The optical module cannot be

detected.

Ports
Table 3-115 describes UCIU ports.

Table 3-115 UCIU ports

Silkscreen Connector Description

M0 to M4 SFP female Primary inter-BBU ports, which connect to the

connector secondary inter-BBU ports.

S0 SFP female Secondary inter-BBU port, which connects to the

connector primary inter-BBU port.

GCK DB15 connector Provides reference clocks when the base station
and a 3012 series base station are combined.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 164

3.4 GATM
The GSM Antenna and TMA control Module (GATM) controls the antenna and TMA.

Panel
Figure 3-75 shows the GATM panel.

Figure 3-75 GATM panel

Function
The GATM has the following functions:

l Controls the RET antenna.

l Supplies power to the TMA.
l Reports the RET control signal alarms.
l Monitors the current from the feeder.
NOTE

The GATM cannot support the TMA and RET antenna simultaneously.

LED
On the GATM there are three LEDs, which indicate the operating status of the GATM. Table
3-116 describes the LEDs on the GATM.

Table 3-116 LEDs on the GATM

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 2s and OFF for 2s The power supply is normal, but the
communication with the BBU incurs
faults.

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The module is functional and

communicates with the BBU
properly.

OFF There is no power supply, or the

module is faulty.

ACT Green ON The AISG link is available.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 165

LED Color Status Description

OFF The AISG link is unavailable.

Blinking irregularly The AISG link is in transmission

state.

ALM Red ON An alarm is generated, such as an

overcurrent alarm.

OFF The module is functional.

Port ID
There are eight ports on the GATM, of which six are used to supply power to the TMA or transmit
the RET control signals, one is used to connect the GATM to the BBU, and one is used as an
extended RS485 port. In addition, there is also a -48 V DC power supply socket. Table 3-117
describes the ports and socket on the GATM.

Table 3-117 Ports and socket on the GATM

Port ID Connector Function

ANT0 to ANT5 SMA female connector Providing power and transmitting control
signals for the RET antenna

COM1 RJ45 connector Connecting to the BBU

COM2 RJ45 connector Serving as an extended RS485 port for

connecting to other devices

-48 V 3V3 power connector Feeding -48 V DC power

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 166

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply

Devices

About This Chapter

4.1 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables

This section describes the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and
power cables for the BTS3900L. The recommended configurations are all based on a fully
configured base station, which has the peak output power. The power requirements of the
customer equipment in the cabinet are also included.

4.2 Power Distribution Principles for a BTS3900L Cabinet

This section describes power distribution principles for a BTS3900L cabinet.

4.3 AC/DC Power System

The AC/DC power system converts /220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.

4.4 DCDU-12A
A direct current distribution unit-12A (DCDU-12A) is 1 U high and provides DC power for all
components in the cabinet.

4.5 DCDU-12B
A direct current distribution unit-12B (DCDU-12B) is 1 U high and provides DC power for all
components in the cabinet.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 167

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

4.1 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and

Power Cables
This section describes the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and
power cables for the BTS3900L. The recommended configurations are all based on a fully
configured base station, which has the peak output power. The power requirements of the
customer equipment in the cabinet are also included.

The configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in the BTS3900 depend on
the external power supply.

NOTE

l The purchased power cables must comply with local regulations.

l The P of table 1 is short for pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a
pole.

DC Input for a BTS3900L Configured with Only RFUs

Table 4-1 lists the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables
when the BTS3900L uses -48 V DC power and is configured with only RFUs.

Table 4-1 Recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when
the BTS3900 configured with only RFUs

Cabinet Requirement for Power Cable Length of the

Configuration(1)(2) the Circuit Between the Input Power Cable
Breakers on External Power
Customer Supply
Equipment(3)(4)(5) Equipment and
DCDU-12As(8)

l 7 to 12 high- 4 x 80 A/1P (by The cross-sectional ≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

power RFUs(6) default) area is 16 mm2
l 2 BBUs (0.025 in.2) and the
power cable is
connected to two
DCDU-12As.

2 x 160 A/1P The cross-sectional

area is 35 mm2
(0.054 in.2) and the
power cable of the
smoke zero halogen
(LSZH) type is
connected to two
DCDU-12As.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 168

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

Cabinet Requirement for Power Cable Length of the

Configuration(1)(2) the Circuit Between the Input Power Cable
Breakers on External Power
Customer Supply
Equipment(3)(4)(5) Equipment and
DCDU-12As(8)

l 7 to 12 low-power 4 x 63 A/1P The cross-sectional

RFUs(7) area is 16 mm2
l 2 BBUs (0.025 in.2) and the
power cable is
connected to two
DCDU-12As.

2 x 80 A/1P The cross-sectional

area is 16 mm2
(0.025 in.2) and the
power cable is
connected to two
DCDU-12As.

l 1 to 6 high-power 2 x 80 A/1P The cross-sectional

RFUs area is 16 mm2
l 2 BBUs (0.025 in.2).
l Three or less than
three RFUs are
configured in a
single RFU
subrack.

l 1 to 6 high-power 3 x 80 A/1P The cross-sectional

RFUs area is 16 mm2
l 2 BBUs (0.025 in.2). One
DCDU-12A is
connected to two
circuit breakers and
the other
DCDU-12A is
connected to one
circuit breaker.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 169

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

Cabinet Requirement for Power Cable Length of the

Configuration(1)(2) the Circuit Between the Input Power Cable
Breakers on External Power
Customer Supply
Equipment(3)(4)(5) Equipment and
DCDU-12As(8)

l 1 to 6 high-power 2 x 80 A/1P The cross-sectional

RFUs (restricted)(9) area is 16 mm2
l 1 BBU (0.025 in.2) and the
power cable is
l All RFUs are
connected to only
configured in the
one DCDU-12A.
same RFU
subrack, and an
RFU subrack can
be configured
with a maximum
of six RFUs.

l 1 to 6 low-power 2 x 63 A/1P The cross-sectional

RFUs area is 16 mm2
l 2 BBUs (0.025 in.2) and the
power cable is
l Three or less than
connected to two
three RFUs are
DCDU-12As.
configured in a
single RFU
subrack.

l 1 to 6 low-power 3 x 63 A/1P The cross-sectional

RFUs area is 16 mm2
l 2 BBUs (0.025 in.2) and the
power cable is
connected to two
DCDU-12As. One
DCDU-12A is
connected to two
circuit breakers and
the other
DCDU-12A is
connected to one
circuit breaker.

2 x 80 A/1P The cross-sectional

area is 16 mm2
(0.025 in.2) and the
power cable is
connected to two
DCDU-12As.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 170

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

Cabinet Requirement for Power Cable Length of the

Configuration(1)(2) the Circuit Between the Input Power Cable
Breakers on External Power
Customer Supply
Equipment(3)(4)(5) Equipment and
DCDU-12As(8)

l 1 to 6 low-power 2 x 63 A/1P The cross-sectional

NOTE

(1) When a base station uses both high-power RFUs and low-power RFUs, the upper-level circuit breakers
are configured as in the case that all RFUs configured are high-power RFUs.
(2) When the customer power supply is sufficient, it is recommended that you configure the upper-level
circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs to meet all configurations. When the
originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements of full configuration of high-power
RFUs, the circuit breakers need to be replaced during capacity expansion.
(3) The requirements for circuit breakers in large-configuration scenarios are applicable to all small-
configuration scenarios.
(4) The circuit breakers with high-load capacities can be used in scenarios where the circuit breakers with
low-load capacities are required. The circuit breakers are listed in descending order of capacity: 1 x 160
A, 2 x 80 A, 2 x 63 A, 1 x 100 A, 1 x 80 A, and 1 x 63 A.
(5) The power consumption of transmission equipment in the cabinet is not included when the load of
circuit breakers for indoor macro base stations is calculated.
(6) High-power RFUs consist of LRFUe, WRFUd, MRFUd, CRFUd, MRFUe, and WRFUe.
(8) When two power inputs are used, they must meet the following requirements:
l Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l Both power inputs use the circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l Both power inputs use power cables of the same cable diameter and length.
l To power on the base station, turn on the circuit breakers for both power inputs before turning on the
circuit breakers for all RF units in the base station. To power off the base station, turn off the circuit
breakers for all RF units in the base station before turning off the circuit breakers for both power
inputs.

(9) When an RFU subrack is configured with six RFUs and two RFUs are powered by a
DCDU-12A corresponding to this RFU subrack, the power cables for the fan assembly or BBU
must be reconnected. For details about how to reconnect the power cables, see the BTS3900L
(Ver.D) Installation Guide.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 171

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

DC Input for a BTS3900L Configured with RFUs and RRUs

When a BTS3900 is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment supplies
-48 V DC power to a DCDU-11A and a DCDU-12B. For details, see 4.2 Power Distribution
Principles for a BTS3900L Cabinet.

l The DCDU-11A distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in a cabinet.
The configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in this scenario are the
same as those in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs but without RRUs. For details, see the
configurations of upper-level circuit breakers when the external power equipment supplies
-48 V DC power in Table 4-1.
l The DCDU-12B distributes the DC power to RRUs. Table 4-2 lists the configurations of
upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in this scenario.

Table 4-2 Recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when
the BTS3900L configured with RFUs and RRUs

Maximum Minimum Cross-Sectional Area of the Length of

Configuration (1) Requirement for Input Power Cable the Input
(2)(3) the Circuit Power
Breaker on the Cable
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)

l 4 to 6 RRUs 1x80 A/1P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of ≤ 10 m

(power DC input power cables (32.81 ft)
consumption of
each RRU < 300
W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption ≤
350 W) (6)

l 1 to 3 RRUs 1×63A/1P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of

(power DC input power cables
consumption of
each RRU < 300
W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption ≤
350 W) (6)

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 172

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

Maximum Minimum Cross-Sectional Area of the Length of

Configuration (1) Requirement for Input Power Cable the Input
(2)(3) the Circuit Power
Breaker on the Cable
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)

l 4 to 6 RRUs (400 1x160 A/1P 35 mm2 or 0.054 in.2 (low

W ≤ power smoke zero halogen), a group of
consumption of DC input power cables
each RRU < 560
W) 2x80 A/1P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups
l 1 BBU of DC input power cables(7)
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption ≤
350 W) (6)

l 1 to 3 RRUs (400 1x80 A/1P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of

W ≤ power DC input power cables
consumption of
each RRU < 560
W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption ≤
350 W) (6)

l 4 to 6 RRUs (300 1x80 A/1P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a groups of

W ≤ power DC input power cables(7)
consumption of
each RRU < 400
W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption ≤
350 W) (6)

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 173

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

Maximum Minimum Cross-Sectional Area of the Length of

Configuration (1) Requirement for Input Power Cable the Input
(2)(3) the Circuit Power
Breaker on the Cable
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)

l 1 to 3 RRUs (300 1x63 A/1P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of

W ≤ power DC input power cables
consumption of
each RRU ≤ 400
W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption ≤
350 W) (6)

l 3 RRUs (power 1x100 A/1P 35 mm2 or 0.054 in.2, a group of

consumption of DC input power cables
each RRU < 300
W) 2x63 A/1P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups
l 3 RRUs (300 W of DC input power cables
≤ power
consumption of
each RRU ≤ 400
W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption ≤
350 W) (6)

l 3 RRUs (power 1x100 A/1P 35 mm2 or 0.054 in.2, a group of

consumption of DC input power cables
each RRU < 300
W)
l 3 RRUs (400 W
≤ power
consumption of
each RRU ≤ 560
W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 174

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

Maximum Minimum Cross-Sectional Area of the Length of

Configuration (1) Requirement for Input Power Cable the Input
(2)(3) the Circuit Power
Breaker on the Cable
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)

consumption ≤ 2x63 A/1P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups

350 W) (6) of DC input power cables(7)

l 3 RRUs (300 W 1x100 A/1P 35 mm2 or 0.054 in.2, a group of

≤ power DC input power cables
consumption of
each RRU < 400 2x63 A/1P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups
W) of DC input power cables(7)
l 3 RRUs (400 W
≤ power
consumption of
each RRU ≤ 560
W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption ≤
350 W) (6)

l 6 RRUs (400 W < 1x160 A/1P 35 mm2 or 0.054 in.2 (low

power smoke zero halogen), a group of
consumption of DC input power cables
each RRU ≤ 560
W) 2x80 A/1P (default) 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups
l 3 RRUs (power of DC input power cables
consumption of
each RRU ≤ 400
W)
l No BBU

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 175

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

Maximum Minimum Cross-Sectional Area of the Length of

Configuration (1) Requirement for Input Power Cable the Input
(2)(3) the Circuit Power
Breaker on the Cable
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)

l 6 RRUs (300 W < 1x160 A/1P 35 mm2 or 0.054 in.2 (low

power smoke zero halogen), a group of
consumption of DC input power cables
each RRU ≤ 560
W) 2x80 A/1P (default) 16mm16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two
l 3 RRUs (power groups of DC input power
consumption of cables
each RRU ≤ 300
W)
l No BBU

l 9 RRUs (power 1x100 A/1P 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2), a group of

consumption of DC input power cables
each RRU ≤ 400
W) 2x63 A/1P (default) 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups
l No BBU of DC input power cables

l 9 RRUs (power 1x80 A/1P (default) 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of

consumption of DC input power cables
each RRU ≤ 300
W)
l No BBU

l 6 RRUs (400 W 1×160A/1P 35 mm2 or 0.054 in.2 (low

≤ power smoke zero halogen), a group of
consumption of DC input power cables
each RRU ≤ 560
W) and 3 RRUs 2×80A/1P(default) 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups
(power of DC input power cables
consumption of
each RRU ≤ 300
W)
l No BBU

l 6 RRUs (power 1×160A/1P 35 mm2 or 0.054 in.2 (low

consumption of smoke zero halogen), a group of
each RRU ≤ 560 DC input power cables
W) and 3 RRUs
(power 2×80A/1P(default) 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups
consumption of of DC input power cables
each RRU ≤400
W)
l No BBU

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 176

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

NOTE

(1)The maximum power consumption of an RRU is as follows:

l The maximum power consumed by one of the following RRUs is 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C,
RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, and RRU3004.
l The maximum power consumed by one of the following RRUs is between 300 W and 400 W:
RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3222, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3828,
RRU3928, and RRU3222.
l The maximum power consumed by one of the following RRUs is between 400 W and 560 W:
RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3829, RRU3240,
RRU3229, RRU3241, and RRU3942.
(2) When a base station uses both high- and low-power RRUs, the specifications of circuit breakers are
determined by the high-power RRUs.
(3) When the customer power supply is sufficient, it is recommended that you configure circuit breakers
based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs to meet all configurations. If the originally configured
circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the
circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
(4) If more than six RRUs are configured, configure a maximum of six input power cables of a cross-
sectional area of 6 mm2 (0.009 in.2) for the RRUs with each power consumption of equal to or lower than
560 W and a maximum of three input power cables of 4 mm2 (0.006 in.2) for the RRUs with each power
consumption of equal to or lower than 400 W.
(5) The circuit breakers used for a scenario with a large configuration can be used in scenarios where the
circuit breakers with small-configuration are required.
(6) The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in scenarios where the circuit breakers with
low-load capability are required. The load capabilities of circuit breakers are in descending order as follows:
160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(7) When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the current corresponding
to the exceeding part of the power consumption needs to be added to the current required for the circuit
breakers that support 350 W.
(8) When two power inputs are used, they must meet the following requirements:
l Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l Both power inputs use the circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l Both power inputs use power cables of the same cable diameter and length.
l To power on the base station, turn on the circuit breakers for both power inputs before turning on the
circuit breakers for all RF units in the base station. To power off the base station, turn off the circuit
breakers for all RF units in the base station before turning off the circuit breakers for both power
inputs.

AC Input Scenario
Table 4-3 lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when AC
power is supplied to the BTS3900L configured with RFUs but without RRUs.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 177

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

Table 4-3 Recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an
AC BTS3900L configured with RFUs

Power Maximum Minimum Cross-Sectional Length of the

Supply Configurati Requireme Area of the Input Input Power
on nts for the Power Cable Cable
Upper-
Level
Circuit
Breaker

220 V AC 4 to 5 PSUs 1x40 A/3 P 6 mm2 (0.009 in.2) ≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

three-phase
2 to 3 PSUs 1x25 A/3 P

220 V AC 5 PSUs 1x100 A/1 P 25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)

single- (Recommend
phase ed)

4 PSUs 1x80 A/1 P

3 PSUs 1x63 A/1 P

4.2 Power Distribution Principles for a BTS3900L Cabinet

This section describes power distribution principles for a BTS3900L cabinet.

Power Distribution Principles for a BTS3900L Cabinet (-48 V DC) Configured with
Only RFUs
The external power supply equipment supplies -48 V DC power to the DCDU-12A in the
BTS3900L cabinet, and the DCDU-12A feeds DC power into all components in the cabinet.
Figure 4-1 shows the power distribution principles and Table 4-4 describes all power output
ports on the DCDU-12A.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 178

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

Figure 4-1 Power distribution principles for the BTS3900L cabinet

Table 4-4 Power output ports on the DCDU-12A

Port Description

LOAD0 to LOAD5 Provide power for RFU0 to RFU5.

LOAD6 Provides power for the fan assembly.

LOAD7 and LOAD8 Provide power for the BBU.

LOAD9 Reserved.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 179

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

Power Distribution Principles for a BTS3900L Cabinet (-48 V DC) Configured with
RFUs and RRUs
When the BTS3900L cabinet is configured with both RFUs and RRUs, the external power
equipment supplies -48 V DC power to the DCDU-12A and DCDU-12B. The power distribution
principles of the DCDU-12A are the same as those of the DCDU-12A in the BTS3900L cabinet
(-48 V DC) configured with only RFUs. The DCDU-12B feeds power into the RRUs, as shown
in Figure 4-2. Table 4-5 describes all power output ports on the DCDU-12B.

Figure 4-2 Power distribution principles for a BTS3900L cabinet (-48 V DC) configured with
both RFUs and RRUs

Table 4-5 Power output ports on the DCDU-12B

Port Description

LOAD0 to LOAD5 Provide power to RRU (≤560W)

LOAD6 to LOAD8 Provide power to RRU (≤400W)

LOAD9 Reserved.

Power Distribution Schemes in the AC Input Scenario

The external power supply equipment supplies AC power input for the EPU05A-02 in the
BTS3900L cabinet. The EPU05A-02 converts the AC power into -48 V DC power and then
supplies the -48 V DC power to the DCDU-12A. Figure 4-3 shows the power distribution
schemes for the BTS3900L when the 220 V AC single-phase power is supplied.
The DCDU-12A supplies power to the BBU, fan assembly, and RFUs in the cabinet. Figure
4-1 shows the power distribution scheme for the DCDU-12A.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 180

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

NOTE

The 220 V AC three-phase power supply has the same power distribution scheme as the 220 V AC single-
phase power supply, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by short-circuiting
bars when the 220 V AC three-phase power supply is used.

Figure 4-3 Power distribution schemes in the AC input scenario configured

4.3 AC/DC Power System

The AC/DC power system converts /220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.

4.3.1 Modules in the AC/DC Power System

The AC/DC power system consists of the PMU, PSUs (AC/DC), and EPU subrack.

Figure 4-4 shows modules in the AC/DC power system.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 181

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

Figure 4-4 Modules in the AC/DC power system

(1) PMU (2) PSUs (3) Filler panel (4) EPU subrack

Table 4-6 lists modules in the AC/DC power system.

Table 4-6 Modules in the AC/DC power system

Module Description

PMU It is installed in slot 0. For details about the

PMU, see 4.3.3 PMU.

PSU Two to five PSUs can be configured in

adjacent slots sequentially from slot 1 to slot
5. For details about PSUs, see 4.3.4 PSU (AC/
DC).

Filler panel A filler panel must be installed in a slot that

is not configured with a PSU.

EPU subrack For details, see 4.3.2 EPU Subrack.

4.3.2 EPU Subrack

The EPU subrack houses the PMU and PSUs. It also distributes AC input power and DC output
power.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 182

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

Exterior
There are two types of EPUs: the EPU05A-02 with 220 V AC input and EPU05A-04 with 110
V AC input. Figure 4-5 and Figure 4-6 show the EPU subracks.

Figure 4-5 EPU05A-02

(1) PSU (2) AC surge protector (3) PSU1/4 circuit breaker, (4) AC OUTPUT circuit
PSU2/5 circuit breaker, breaker
and PSU3 circuit breaker

(5) BAT circuit breaker (6) Circuit breaker for RFC1 (7) Circuit breaker for (8) Output port for the
RFC2 battery

(9) RFC1 output port (10) RFC2 output port (11) LOAD0 to LOAD8 (12) Spare fuse box
output ports

(13) AC INPUT (14) AC OUTPUT (15) PMU (16) Short-circuiting bar(1)

NOTE
(1) On an EPU subrack with 220 V AC single-phase input, a short-circuiting bar is installed on the AC
INPUT wiring terminal to connect the L1, L2, and L3 terminals. On an EPU subrack with 220 V AC three-
phase input, there is no short-circuiting bar on the AC INPUT wiring terminal.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 183

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

Figure 4-6 EPU05A-04

(1) PSU (2) AC surge protector (3) PSU circuit breaker (4) AC OUTPUT1/AC
OUTPUT2 circuit breaker

(5) BAT circuit breaker (6) Circuit breaker for (7) Circuit breaker for (8) Output port for the battery
RFC1 RFC2

(9) RFC1 output port (10) RFC2 output port (11) LOAD0 to LOAD8 (12) Spare fuse box
output ports

(13) AC INPUT (14) AC OUTPUT (15) PMU -

DC output terminals
The EPU subrack provides 12 DC outputs. Figure 4-7 shows the DC output terminals and Table
4-7 lists the specifications of the DC outputs.

Figure 4-7 DC output terminals of the EPU subrack

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 184

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

Table 4-7 Specification of the DC outputs

DC Output DC Power Supply Connector for the Maximum Output

Terminal Unit DC Output Current
Terminal

BAT IBBS200D or OT terminal 250 A (125 A/2 P)

IBBS200T

RFC1 RFC 125 A (125 A/1 P)

RFC2 RFC 125 A (125 A/1 P)

LOAD0 and LOAD1 BBU EPC4 connector 30 A (30 A)

LOAD2 FAN 30 A (30 A)

LOAD3 to LOAD6 TM(1)

LOAD7 TMC

LOAD8 FAN/TEC(2)

NOTE

(1) TM is the customer transmission equipment. LOAD3, LOAD4, LOAD5, and LOAD6 are DC output
terminals for the transmission equipment, supporting four DC outputs.
(2) When the IBBS200D is configured, LOAD8 is the DC output terminal for the IBBS200D fan power
cable. When IBBS200T is configured, LOAD8 is the DC output terminal for the IBBS200T TEC power
cable.

Circuit breakers
There are several circuit breakers on the EPU subrack panel to control the DC outputs. Figure
4-8 shows the position of circuit breakers and Table 4-8 describes the specifications of circuit
breakers.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 185

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

Figure 4-8 Position of circuit breakers

Table 4-8 Specifications of circuit breakers

Circuit Breaker Silkscreen on the Panel Requirement for the

Circuit Breaker

PSU circuit breakers PSU1/4 1x40 A/1 P

(EPU05A-02)
PSU2/5 1x40 A/1 P

PSU 3 1x25 A/1 P

PSU circuit breakers PSU 1x100 A/2 P

(EPU05A-04)

AC output circuit breaker AC OUTPUT 1x16 A/2 P

(EPU05A-02)

AC output circuit breaker AC OUTPUT1 and AC 2x16 A/1 P

(EPU05A-04) OUTPUT2

Storage battery circuit BAT 1x125 A/2 P

breaker

RFC circuit breaker RFC 1 and RFC 2 2x125 A/1 P

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 186

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

4.3.3 PMU
The power monitoring unit 11A (PMU 11A) provides the following functions: power system
management, battery management, power monitoring, and alarm reporting.

Exterior
Figure 4-9 shows the exterior of a PMU 11A.

Figure 4-9 Exterior of a PMU 11A

Functions
The PMU 11A performs the following functions:

l Communicates with the upper-level device through an RS485 serial port.

l Manages the power system and charges and discharges storage batteries.
l Reports alarms related to the door status, standby Boolean values, and battery temperature.
l Monitors power distribution and reports alarms.
l Communicates with the battery cabinet through an RS485 serial port.

Ports
Figure 4-10 shows the ports on the front panel of the PMU 11A.

Figure 4-10 Ports on the front panel of the PMU 11A

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 187

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

Table 4-9 describes the ports on the front panel of the PMU 11A.

Table 4-9 Ports on the front panel of the PMU 11A

No. Silkscreen Connector Remarks

1 GATE 2-pin connector Connects to a door

status sensor

2 TEM_BAT 2-pin connector Monitors the battery

temperature sensor

3 COM_IN RJ45 connector BBU

communication port
which is connected to
the BBU or
communicates with
the upper-level
monitoring board

4 COM_OUT RJ45 connector Lower-level

monitoring board

5 COM_485 RJ45 connector Connects to the

monitoring board in
the battery cabinet,
and receives alarm
signals from the
battery cabinet.

Indicators
Table 4-10 describes the indicators on the PMU 11A.

Table 4-10 Indicators on the PMU 11A

Silks Colo Meaning Status Meaning

creen r

RUN Gree Running Steady on The PMU 11A is performing

n indicator startup, self-check, loading, and
activation.

Blinking (on for The PMU 11A is functional and

1s and off for 1s) communicating with the main
control board in the BBU properly.
(This status does not necessarily
mean that the PMU 11A has been
configured.)

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 188

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

Silks Colo Meaning Status Meaning

creen r

Blinking (on for The PMU 11A is functional but

0.125s and off for unable to communicate properly.
0.125s)

Steady off The PMU 11A is faulty or there is

no DC power supply.

ALM Red Alarm indicator Steady on Alarms are generated, and the
module must be replaced.

Steady off No alarm is generated.

Blinking (on for An alarm is generated and you

1s and off for 1s) need to locate the fault before
determining whether to replace the
PMU 11A.

DIP Switch
There is a DIP switch on the left panel of the PMU 11A. The DIP switch has eight bits, where
the four least significant bits (1, 2, 3, and 4) define the monitoring address of the PMU 11A, and
the four most significant bits (5, 6, 7, and 8) are not defined but reserved for future use.

ON is indicated by 1, and OFF is indicated by 0. The monitoring address of the PMU 11A is set
to 3 by default before delivery, as shown in Figure 4-11.

Figure 4-11 DIP switch on the left panel of the PMU 11A

NOTE

When two PMU 11As share the same RS485 bus in the case that two or more APM30Hs are configured
in a base station, the monitoring address of the second PMU 11A is set to 4, the four least significant bits
(1, 2, 3, and 4) set to be 0010.

4.3.4 PSU (AC/DC)

The power supply unit (PSU) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 189

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

Exterior
Figure 4-12 shows the exterior of a PSU.

Figure 4-12 Exterior of a PSU

Functions
The PSU performs the following functions:

l Converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC. The PMU adjusts the output voltage.
l The DC output of the PSU provides protection against overcurrent, overvoltage, and
overtemperature.
l Dissipates heat using its built-in fans.

Indicators
Figure 4-13 shows the indicators on the PSU panel.

Figure 4-13 Indicators on the PSU panel

(1) Power indicator (2) Protection indicator (3) Fault indicator

Table 4-11 describes the indicators on the PSU panel.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 190

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

Table 4-11 Indicators on the PSU

Silkscr Color Status Meaning

een

Power Green Steady on The board is functional.

indicato
r Blinking (on for 0.125s PSU online loading
and off for 0.125s)

Steady off The mains supply or PSU is faulty.

Protecti Yellow Steady off Yes

on
indicato Steady on An alarm triggered by an external factor is
r generated.

Blinking (on for 1s and The communication between the PSU and the
off for 1s) PMU is interrupted.

Fault Red Steady off Yes

indicato
r Steady on The PSU is faulty or shut down in an
emergency. Locate the fault before
determining whether to replace the PSU.

4.4 DCDU-12A
A direct current distribution unit-12A (DCDU-12A) is 1 U high and provides DC power for all
components in the cabinet.

Exterior
Figure 4-14 shows a DCDU-12A.

Figure 4-14 Front view of a DCDU-12A

(1) DC input terminal (2) DC output terminal (3) Spare fuse box (4) Grounding point

Functions
The DCDU-12A provides ten -48 V DC outputs using same fuse configurations to meet the
power distribution requirements of the RFC.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 191

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

Table 4-12 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-12A.

Table 4-12 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-12A

DCDU Type DC Output Power-Consuming Specification of

Terminal Device the Fuse

DCDU-12A LOAD0 to LOAD5 RFU 0 to RFU 5 30 A

LOAD6 FAN

LOAD7 Reserved

LOAD8 Reserved

LOAD9 Reserved

Ports
Figure 4-15 shows the ports on the DCDU-12A panel.

Figure 4-15 Ports on the DCDU-12A panel

Table 4-13 shows the terminals and switches on the DCDU-12A panel.

Table 4-13 Terminals and switches on the DCDU-12A panel

N Port Silkscreen Matched Terminal Description

o. and Cable

(1) DC input NEG(-) One-hole OT Negative power input wiring

terminals terminal (M6) with terminal
two inputs. The
maximum cross-

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 192

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

N Port Silkscreen Matched Terminal Description

o. and Cable

RTN(+) sectional area of the Positive power input wiring

cable is 35 mm2 terminal
(0.054 in.2) in one
input or 25 mm2
(0.039 in.2)in two
inputs.

(2) Fuse LOAD0 to - It controls the ports LOAD0 to

block LOAD9 LOAD9, and therefore controls
the power supplies to RFUs and
fan assemblies.
The indicator on the fuse block
indicates the status of the fuse.
l When the indicator is steady
on, the fuse is faulty and
needs to be replaced.
l When the indicator is steady
off, the fuse is working
properly.

(3) DC LOAD0 to EPC4 connectors are For the specifications of the DC

output LOAD9 used, as shown in output, see Table 4-12.
terminals Figure 4-16. They
support cables with a
cross-sectional area
of 1.5mm2 (0.002 in.
2) to 4mm2(0.006 in.
2).

(4) Spare - - There are three 30 A spare fuses

fuse box in the spare fuse box.

Figure 4-16 Exterior of an EPC4 connector

Technical Specifications
Table 4-14 lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-12A.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 193

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

Table 4-14 Technical specifications of a DCDU-12A

Item Specifications

Dimensions (H x W x D) The DCDU-12A is 1 U high and can be

installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its
dimensions are as follows:
l 42 mm x 442 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x 17.4
in. x 2.56 in.) (without mounting ears)
l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x
19 in. x 2.56 in.) (with mounting ears)

Surge protection specifications -48 V DC power port, 10 kA (8/20 μs)

differential mode

-48 V DC power port, 20kA (8/20 μs)

common mode

4.5 DCDU-12B
A direct current distribution unit-12B (DCDU-12B) is 1 U high and provides DC power for all
components in the cabinet.

Exterior
Figure 4-17 and Figure 4-18 show exterior of a DCDU-12B.

Figure 4-17 Front view of a DCDU-12B

(1) DC input terminal (2) DC output terminal (3) Spare fuse box (4) Ground point

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 194

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

Figure 4-18 Rear view of a DCDU-12B

(1) Ground point

NOTE
The DCDU-12B uses the equipotential connection point and ground point in the following scenarios:
l Scenario 1: The DCDU-12B is installed on an open subrack. An equipotential cable connects the
equipotential connection point near the mounting ear of the DCDU-12B to the ground bar of the open
rack.
l Scenario 2: The DCDU-12B is installed on a wall as a standalone power distribution device. The ground
point at the rear of the DCDU-12B is connected to the ground bar in the cabinet.

Functions
The DCDU-12B provides ten -48 V DC outputs using same fuse configurations to meet the
power distribution requirements of different distributed base stations.

Table 4-15 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-12B.

Table 4-15 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-12B

DCDU Type DC output Power- Specificatio Remarks

ports Consuming n of the
Device Fuse

DCDU-12B LOAD0 to RRU0 to RRU5 30 A l BTS3900

LOAD5 l BTS3900A
LOAD6 BBU or l DBS3900
transmission l Mini NodeB
device

LOAD7 BBU or
transmission
device

LOAD8 EMUA or
transmission
device

LOAD9 Fan assembly

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 195

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

NOTE
It is recommended that the power output terminals on the DCDU-12B be connected as follows:
l The LOAD0 to LOAD5 terminals are connected to cables with a cross-sectional area of 3.3mm2 (0.005
in.2) to 10mm2 (0.015 in.2) to provide power for RRU 0 to RRU 5.
l The LOAD6 to LOAD8 terminals are connected to cables with a cross-sectional area of 1.5mm2 (0.002
in.2) to 4mm2(0.006 in.2) to provide power for RRU 6 to RRU 8.
l The LOAD9 terminal is reserved.

Ports
Figure 4-19 shows the ports on the DCDU-12B panel.

Figure 4-19 Ports on the DCDU-12B panel

Table 4-16 shows the terminals and switches on the DCDU-12B panel.

Table 4-16 Terminals and switches on the DCDU-12B panel

N Port Silkscreen Matched Terminal Remarks

o. and Cable

(1) DC input NEG(-) One-hole OT Negative power input wiring

terminals terminal (M6) with terminal
two inputs. The
maximum cross-
sectional area of the
cable is 35 mm2
(0.054 in.2) in one
input or 25 mm2
(0.039 in.2)in two
inputs. The default
cross-sectional area

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 196

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

N Port Silkscreen Matched Terminal Remarks

o. and Cable

RTN(+) is 16 mm2 (0.025 in. Positive power input wiring

2). terminal

(2) Fuse LOAD0 to - It controls ports LOAD0 to

block LOAD9 LOAD9, and therefore controls
the power supplies to the BBU,
fan assemblies, and
transmission equipment.
The indicator on the fuse block
indicates the status of the fuse.
l When the indicator is steady
on, the fuse is faulty and
needs to be replaced.
l When the indicator is steady
off, the fuse is working
properly.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 197

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

N Port Silkscreen Matched Terminal Remarks

o. and Cable

(3) DC LOAD0 to l Figure 4-20 For the specifications of the DC

output LOAD9 shows the EPC5 output, see Table 4-15.
ports connector for
ports LOAD0 to
LOAD5. The
cross-sectional
area of the cable is
3.3mm2 (0.005 in.
2) to 10mm2

(0.015 in.2).
l Figure 4-21
shows the EPC4
connector for
ports LOAD6 to
LOAD9. The
cross-sectional
area of the cable is
1.5mm2 (0.002 in.
2) to 4mm2(0.006

in.2).
NOTE
The EPC4 connector
and EPC5 connector
must be connected to
the cable onsite.

(4) Spare - - There are three 30 A spare fuses

fuse box in the spare fuse box.

NOTE
Fuse blocks and DC output terminals are jointly called fuse terminal blocks.

Figure 4-20 Exterior of an EPC5 connector

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 198

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 4 BTS3900L Power System and Power Supply Devices

Figure 4-21 Exterior of an EPC4 connector

Technical Specifications
Table 4-17 lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-12B.

Table 4-17 Technical specifications of a DCDU-12B

Item Specifications

Dimensions (H x W x D) The DCDU-12B is 1 U high and can be

Surge Protection Specifications -48 V DC power port, 10 kA (8/20 μs)

differential mode

-48 V DC power port, 20 kA (8/20 μs)

common mode

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 199

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 5 BTS3900L Monitoring System and Monitoring Module

5 BTS3900L Monitoring System and

Monitoring Module

About This Chapter

5.1 Principles for Monitoring a BTS3900L Cabinet

The fan monitoring unit type EA (FMUEA) board in the BTS3900L cabinet is connected to the
MON port on the BBU by using the RS485 serial bus. It collects the alarms from the fan assembly
and reports the alarms to the BBU.

5.2 Customized Alarm Input Principles for the BTS3900L

When an alarm is generated by the customized equipment, the alarm must be reported to the
BBU.

5.3 BTS3900L Monitoring Module

The monitoring module in the BTS3900L cabinet collects monitoring signals from boards and
components and reports the monitoring signals to the BBU3900.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 200

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 5 BTS3900L Monitoring System and Monitoring Module

5.1 Principles for Monitoring a BTS3900L Cabinet

FMUEA is configured in the fan assembly of the BTS3900L cabinet. For details about the
monitoring ports on the FMUEA, see 5.3.1 Fan Assembly.

Two BBUs are required in an evolution from a single- or dual-mode scenario as shown in Figure
5-1 to a triple-mode scenario as shown in Figure 5-2 or in a new triple-mode scenario as shown
in Figure 5-2. The BBU installed in the upper part of the cabinet is BBU 0, and the BBU installed
in the lower part of the cabinet is BBU 1. In a triple-mode BTS3900L, all the monitoring
equipment is connected to BBU 0. The monitoring principles in the triple-mode BTS3900L are
the same as that in the dual-mode BTS3900L.

NOTE

In this document, BBU 0 and BBU 1 are used to exemplify two BBUs in a triple-mode BTS3900L.
In a triple-mode BTS3900L, BBU 0 is the root BBU and BBU 1 is the leaf BBU.

Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2 show the principles for monitoring a BTS3900L.

Figure 5-1 Principles for monitoring a single- or dual-mode BTS3900L

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 201

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 5 BTS3900L Monitoring System and Monitoring Module

(1) BTS3900L with a GATM (2) BTS3900L without a GATM

Figure 5-2 Principles for monitoring a triple-mode BTS3900L

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 202

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 5 BTS3900L Monitoring System and Monitoring Module

(1) BTS3900L with a GATM (2) BTS3900L without a GATM

5.2 Customized Alarm Input Principles for the BTS3900L

When an alarm is generated by the customized equipment, the alarm must be reported to the
BBU.
Customized alarms are reported to the BBU by any of the following methods:
l The customized alarms are collected by the UPEU or UEIU in the BBU. UPEU is short for
universal power and environment interface unit, and UEIU is short for universal
environment interface unit.
l The customized alarms are collected by the environment monitoring unit (EMU).
For details about the configuration of the customized alarms, see Initial Configuration Guide.

Monitoring Board
If customer equipment has customized alarms to report to the BBU, a monitoring board needs
to be configured for the customer equipment according to the actual number of the customized
alarms, as listed in Table 5-1.

Table 5-1 Number of customized alarms supported by the monitoring board

Monitoring Board Number of Customized Alarms

UPEU 8

UEIU 8

UPEU+UEIU 16

EMU 32

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 203

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 5 BTS3900L Monitoring System and Monitoring Module

NOTE

l A base station supports a maximum of 32 Boolean alarms.

l The combination of UPEU+UEIU/UPEU can support 16 Boolean alarms.
l If backup power is required by the BBU, two UPEUs are configured instead of UPEU+UEIU.
l Analog values can be monitored only by the EMU.
l The EMU with sensors can be configured according to site requirements.
l If an environment monitoring unit (EMU) is configured, all Boolean alarms are reported by the EMU.

Principles for Configuring Customized Alarms

Customized Alarms Collected by the UPEU or UEIU

Each UPEU or UEIU in the BBU supports eight Boolean alarm inputs. A UPEU and a UEIU or
a maximum of two UPEUs can be configured in the BBU to receive 16 Boolean alarm inputs.
When 16 or fewer customized alarm inputs are required, the UPEU or UEIU is used to collect
the customized alarms, as shown in Figure 5-3.

Figure 5-3 Customized alarms collected by the UPEU or UEIU

Customized Alarms Collected by the EMU

Each EMU supports 32 Boolean alarm inputs and two RS485 signal inputs. When more than 16
Boolean alarm inputs are required, the EMU can be configured for the BTS3900L, as shown in
Figure 5-4.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 204

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 5 BTS3900L Monitoring System and Monitoring Module

Figure 5-4 Customized alarms collected by the EMU

5.3 BTS3900L Monitoring Module

The monitoring module in the BTS3900L cabinet collects monitoring signals from boards and
components and reports the monitoring signals to the BBU3900.

The BTS3900L cabinet is monitored by the FMUEA, which is a part of the fan assembly. For
details about the exterior, function, and ports of the FMUEA, see 5.3.1 Fan Assembly.

5.3.1 Fan Assembly

A fan assembly consists of a fan subrack, fans, and the fan monitoring unit type EA (FMUEA).

Exterior
Figure 5-5 shows the exterior of a fan assembly.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 205

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 5 BTS3900L Monitoring System and Monitoring Module

Figure 5-5 Exterior of a fan assembly

(1) Fan (2) Fan subrack (3) FMUEA

Functions
The fan assembly performs the following functions:
l Provides ventilation and dissipates heat from the cabinet.
l Monitors the temperature of fans.
l Supports fan speed adjustment based on temperature or controlled by the BBU.
l Stops the fans automatically when the ambient temperature is low.

FMUEA
Figure 5-6 shows the ports on an FMUEA.

Figure 5-6 Ports on an FMUEA

Table 5-2 describes the indicators on the FMUEA. Table 5-3 describes the ports on the FMUEA.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 206

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 5 BTS3900L Monitoring System and Monitoring Module

Table 5-2 Indicators on the FMUEA

Silkscre Color Status Meaning

RUN Green On for 0.125s and off for The module is functional but fails to
0.125s communicate with the BBU or an
upper-level FMUEA.

On for 1s and off for 1s The module is functional and is

communicating with the BBU or an
upper-level FMUEA.

Steady off There is no power supply, or the

module is faulty.

ALM Red On for 1s and off for 1s The module is reporting alarms.

Steady off The module is not reporting alarms.

Steady on An alarm is generated, and the board

must be replaced.

Table 5-3 Ports on the FMUEA

Port Type Silkscreen Connector Description

Power supply -48 V 3V3 connector Supporting -48 V DC

socket power input

ELU port SENSOR RJ45 connector Connecting the ELU.

Communicatio COM OUT RJ45 connector Cascading the lower-level

n port FMUEA or lower-level
PMU or lower-level EMU.

COM IN RJ45 connector Connecting to the BBU or

upper-level FMUEA or
cascading the upper-level
GATM.

5.3.2 EMU
The Environment Monitoring Unit (EMU) is an environmental monitoring device that monitors
environmental conditions of the equipment room.

The EMU connects to main equipment and performs monitoring functions through the alarm
cables. The EMU performs the following functions:

l Provides monitoring ports for the temperature, humidity, water, infrared, door control
sensors, Boolean signals, analog signals, and output control signals.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 207

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900L(Ver.D)
Hardware Description 5 BTS3900L Monitoring System and Monitoring Module

l Provides the RS485 and RS232 ports for the communication with the base station.

For details about the structure and functions of the EMU, see EMU User Guide.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 208

6 BTS3900L Components

About This Chapter

This section describes the components of a BTS3900L cabinet.

6.1 Fan Assembly

A fan assembly consists of a fan subrack, fans, and the fan monitoring unit type EA (FMUEA).

6.2 ELU
The electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate
troubleshooting.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 209

6.1 Fan Assembly

A fan assembly consists of a fan subrack, fans, and the fan monitoring unit type EA (FMUEA).

Exterior
Figure 6-1 shows the exterior of a fan assembly.

Figure 6-1 Exterior of a fan assembly

(1) Fan (2) Fan subrack (3) FMUEA

FMUEA
Figure 6-2 shows the ports on an FMUEA.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 210

Figure 6-2 Ports on an FMUEA

Table 6-1 describes the indicators on the FMUEA. Table 6-2 describes the ports on the FMUEA.

Table 6-1 Indicators on the FMUEA

Silkscre Color Status Meaning

RUN Green On for 0.125s and off for The module is functional but fails to
0.125s communicate with the BBU or an
upper-level FMUEA.

On for 1s and off for 1s The module is functional and is

communicating with the BBU or an
upper-level FMUEA.

Steady off There is no power supply, or the

module is faulty.

ALM Red On for 1s and off for 1s The module is reporting alarms.

Steady off The module is not reporting alarms.

Steady on An alarm is generated, and the board

must be replaced.

Table 6-2 Ports on the FMUEA

Port Type Silkscreen Connector Description

Power supply -48 V 3V3 connector Supporting -48 V DC

socket power input

ELU port SENSOR RJ45 connector Connecting the ELU.

Communicatio COM OUT RJ45 connector Cascading the lower-level

n port FMUEA or lower-level
PMU or lower-level EMU.

COM IN RJ45 connector Connecting to the BBU or

upper-level FMUEA or
cascading the upper-level
GATM.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 211

6.2 ELU
The electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate
troubleshooting.

The ELU is in the air intake vent on the left side of the cabinet. Figure 6-3 shows the exterior
and position of the ELU.

Figure 6-3 ELU

1. ELU 2. RJ45 port

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 212

7 BTS3900L Cables

About This Chapter

The BTS3900L cables are classified into the PGND cables, power cables, transmission cables,
CPRI cables, signal cables, and RF cables.

NOTE

The colors and structures of cables delivered by Huawei vary according to countries and areas. If cables
are purchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.

7.1 BTS3900L Cable List

The BTS3900L cables are classified into the PGND cables, power cables, transmission cables,
CPRI cables, signal cables, and RF cables.
7.2 Cable Connections
This chapter describes the connection principles of power cables, transmission cables, CPRI
cables, monitoring cables, and RF cables.
7.3 Power Cables
This chapter describes power cables in a BTS3900L, including the input power cable for the
cabinet, BBU power cable, fan assembly power cable, and RFU power cable.
7.4 Transmission Cables
This chapter describes the transmission cables in a BTS3900L, including the E1/T1 signal cable,
FE/GE Ethernet cable, FE/GE fiber optic cable, interconnection cable between the FE electrical
ports, and interconnection cable between the FE optical ports.
7.5 Signal Cables
This chapter describes the signal cables in a BTS3900L, including the monitoring signal cable
for the fan assembly, fan assembly cascading signal cable, monitoring signal cable for the EMU,
BBU alarm cable, GPS signal cable, and ELU signal cable.
7.6 RF Cables
This chapter describes the RF cables in a BTS3900L, including the RF jumper and inter-RFU
RF signal cable.
7.7 CPRI Electrical Cable
The CPRI electrical cable enables high speed communication between the BBU3900 and the
RFU.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 213

7.8 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable

CPRI fiber optic cables are classified into multimode fiber optic cables and single-mode fiber
optic cables. They transmit CPRI signals.

7.9 PGND Cables

The PGND cables are used to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet and the modules in the
cabinet. The maximum length of a PGND cable is 15 m (49.21 ft).

7.10 Equipotential Cables

Equipotential cables connect the PGND terminals of two cabinets. Equipotential cables ensure
that cabinets are equipotential and that base stations run properly.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 214

7.1 BTS3900L Cable List

The BTS3900L cables are classified into the PGND cables, power cables, transmission cables,
CPRI cables, signal cables, and RF cables.

PGND Cables and Equipotential Cables

Table 7-1 describes the PGND cables and equipotential cables.

Table 7-1 PGND cables and equipotential Cables

Item Cable One End The Other End

Connector Installatio Connector Installatio

n Position n Position

Cables to be PGND cable OT terminal Ground OT terminal External

installed for the (M8) terminal on (M8) ground bar
onsite cabinet the cabinet

7.10 OT terminal Wiring OT terminal Wiring

Equipotenti (M6) terminal for (M6) terminal for
al Cables the the
(between the equipotentia equipotential
BTS3900L l cable on the cable on the
cabinet and cabinet subrack
IMS06)

7.10 OT terminal Wiring OT terminal Wiring

Equipotenti (M6) terminal for (M6) terminal for
al Cables the the
(between the equipotentia equipotential
IMS06 and l cable on the cable on the
door of the subrack door of the
subrack) subrack

Cables PGND cable OT terminal Ground OT terminal Ground

installed for a module (M4) terminal on a (M4) terminal for
before module the PGND
delivery cable in the
cabinet

Power Cables
Table 7-2 describes the power cables.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 215

Table 7-2 Power cables

Item Cable One End The Other End

Conne Installation Connector Installatio

ctor Position n Position

Cables to be 7.3.1 OT Port AC INPUT on Depending External

installed EPU05A-02 termina the EPU05A-02 in on the power
onsite Power l (M6) the IMS06 external equipment
Cable power
equipment

7.3.2 OT Global: l Dependi l External

DCDU-12A termina l Black wire: ng on the equipme
Input Power l (M6) RTN(+) external nt in DC
Cable terminal on the power scenario
DCDU-12A equipme s
nt in DC l RTN(+)
l Blue wire: NEG scenario
(-) terminal on and NEG
s (-)
the DCDU-12A
l OT terminal
U.K. terminal s near
l Blue wire: RTN (M6) in RFC_1
(+) terminal on AC and
the DCDU-12A scenario RFC_2
l Gray wire: NEG s on the
(-) terminal on EPU05A
the DCDU-12A -02 in
AC
scenario
s

7.3.3 OT Global: Depending External

(Optional) termina l Black wire: on the power
DCDU-12B l (M6) RTN(+) external equipment
Input Power terminal on the power
Cable DCDU-12B equipment

l Blue wire: NEG

(-) terminal on
the DCDU-12B
U.K
l Blue wire: RTN
(+) terminal on
the DCDU-12B
l Gray wire: NEG
(-) terminal on
the DCDU-12B

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 216

Item Cable One End The Other End

Conne Installation Connector Installatio

ctor Position n Position

RRU Power EPC4 l EPC4 Depending PWR port

Cables or connector: one on the RRU on the RRU
(optional) EPC5 of the LOAD6 model
connect to LOAD8 ports
or on the
DCDU-12B
l EPC5
connector: one
of the LOAD0
to LOAD5 ports
on the
DCDU-12B

Cables RFU Power 3V3 PWR port on an EPC4 One of the

installed Cables connect RFU connector LOAD0 to
before or LOAD5
delivery ports on the
DCDU-12A

FAN 03C 3V3 -48V port on the EPC4 LOAD6

Power Cable connect FAN 03C connector port on the
or DCDU-12A

BBU Power 3V3 -48V port on the EPC4 LOAD7 or

Cable connect UPEU connector LOAD8
or port on the
DCDU-12A

GATM 3V3 -48V port on the EPC4 LOAD9

Power Cable connect GATM connector port on the
or DCDU-12A

Transmission Cables
Table 7-3 describes the transmission cables.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 217

Table 7-3 Transmission cables

Category Cable One End The Other End

Connector Installatio Connector Installatio

n Position n Position

Cables to be 7.4.1 E1/T1 DB26 male E1/T1 port Depending External

installed Cable connector on the on the transmission
onsite GTMU, external equipment
WMPT, or transmission
UMPT equipment

7.4.2 FE/GE RJ45 FE0 port on RJ45 External

Ethernet connector the GTMU, connector transmission
Cable WMPT, equipment
LMPT, or
UMPT

7.4.3 FE/GE LC SFP0 or l FC External

Fiber Optic connector SFP1 port on connecto transmission
Cable the GTMU, r equipment
WMPT, l SC
LMPT, or connecto
UMPT r
l LC
connecto
r

Cables 7.4.4 RJ45 FE0 port on RJ45 FE0 port on

installed Interconnec connector the GTMU, connector the WMPT
before tion Cable WMPT,
delivery Between the LMPT, or
FE UMPT
Electrical
Ports

7.4.5 LC FE1 port on LC FE1 port on

Interconnec connector the GTMU, connector the WMPT
tion Cable WMPT,
Between FE LMPT, or
Optical UMPT
Ports

CPRI Cables
Table 7-4 describes the CPRI cables.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 218

Table 7-4 CPRI cables

Category Cable One End The Other End

Connector Installatio Connector Installatio

n Position n Position

Cables 7.7 CPRI SFP20 male SFP20 male CPRI0 or

installed Electrical connector connector CPRI1 port
before Cable on the RFU
delivery

Cables to be 7.8 CPRI DLC l CPRI0 to DLC CPRI port on

installed on Fiber Optic connector CPRI5 connector the RRU
site Cable ports on
(optional) the
GTMU in
the BBU
l CPRI0 to
CPRI5
ports or
CPRI0 to
CPRI2
ports on
the
WBBP in
the BBU
l CPRI0 to
CPRI5
ports on
the LBBP
in the
BBU

NOTE

(1) If boards and modules have been installed in a BTS3900L cabinet before delivery, CPRI electrical cables
are also installed in the cabinet before delivery. In this case, only the CPRI electrical cables between BTS3900
cabinets must be installed onsite.

Signal Cables
Table 7-5 describes the signal cables.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 219

Table 7-5 Signal cables

Category Cable One End The Other End

Connector Installatio Connector Installatio

n Position n Position

Cables to be 7.5.4 DB9 male RS485 port RJ45 MON1 port

installed Monitoring connector on the EMU connector on the UPEU
onsite Signal or UEIU
Cable for
the EMU

7.5.6 BBU RJ45 EXT-ALM0 RJ45 External

Alarm connector port on the connector alarm device
Cable UPEU or
UEIU

7.5.7 GPS SMA male GPS port on Type N GPS surge

Clock connector the USCU female protector
Signal connector
Cable

7.5.3 Fan RJ45 COM OUT RJ45 COM IN port

Assembly connector port on the connector on the lower-
Cascade upper-level level fan
Signal fan assembly assembly
Cable NOTE NOTE
The upper- The lower-
level fan level fan
assembly assembly
communicat communicat
es with the es with the
BBU BBU by
directly. means of the
upper-level
fan
assembly.

7.5.5 BBU DLC M0 to M4 DLC l CI port on

interconnec connector ports on the connector the
tion signal UCIU in the UMPT in
cable BBU the BBU
l S0 port
on the
UCIU in
the BBU

RET SMA elbow ANT0 to SMA straight DC/OOK

Control male ANT5 ports male port on the
Signal connector on the connector DIN Bias-
Cable GATM Tee

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 220

Category Cable One End The Other End

Connector Installatio Connector Installatio

n Position n Position

Adapter USB USB(1) port Network Network

Used for connector on the connector cable
Local UMPT in the
Maintenance BBU

7.5.14 Cable DB15 male GCK port on MD36 or DGLUb on

Between connector the UCIU in DB15 male the DCTB
two the BBU connector
Combined
Base
Stations

PMU 11A- RJ45 COM_IN RJ45 MON1 port

BBU connector port on the connector on the UPEU
Monitoring PMU 11A in or UEIU
Signal Cable the
(AC EPU05A-02
scenario) in the IMS06

Cables 7.5.2 RJ45 COM IN port RJ45 MON0 port

installed Monitoring connector on the fan connector on the UPEU
before Signal assembly or UEIU
delivery Cable for
the Fan
Assembly

7.5.9 Signal RJ45 ELU RJ45 SENSOR

Cable for connector connector port on the
the ELU fan assembly

FMUEA- RJ45 COM2 port RJ45 COM_IN

GATM connector on the connector port on the
Monitoring GATM lower-level
Signal fan box
Cable

7.5.10 RJ45 COM1 port RJ45 MON0 or

Monitoring connector on the connector MON1 port
Signal GATM on the UPEU
Cable for
the GATM
(DC
scenario)

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 221

NOTE

a: The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption, and the USB port can be shut down using
commands. The USB commission port is used for commissioning the base station rather than configuring
and exporting information of the base station.

RF Cables
Table 7-6 describes the RF cables.

Table 7-6 RF cables

Category Cable One End The Other End

Connector Installatio Connector Installatio

n Position n Position

Cables to be 7.6.1 RF DIN elbow A DIN straight l Feeder of

installed Jumper male correspondin male the
onsite connector g port on the connector antenna
RFU panel system
(no
GATM
configure
d)
l ANT port
on the
Bias-Tee
(GATM
configure
d)

Cables 7.6.2 Inter- QMA elbow RX OUT QMA elbow RX IN port

installed RFU RF male port on the male on the panel
before Signal connector RFU panel connector of another
delivery Cable RFU

7.2 Cable Connections

This chapter describes the connection principles of power cables, transmission cables, CPRI
cables, monitoring cables, and RF cables.

7.2.1 Power Cable Connections

This section describes the power cable connections of a BTS3900L cabinet.

Power Cable Connections in the -48 V DC Scenario

Figure 7-1 shows the power cable connections in the -48 V DC scenario, using the BTS3900L
cabinet in full configuration as an example.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 222

Figure 7-1 Power cable connections

Table 7-7 describes the power cable connections.

Table 7-7 Power cable connections

Cable No. Cable Description

P0 to P5, P10 to P15 For details, see 7.3.6 RFU Power Cable.

P6 and P16 For details, see 7.3.5 Fan Assembly Power

Cable.

P7 and P8 For details, see 7.3.4 BBU Power Cable.

P9 For details, see 7.3.8 GATM Power Cable.

P17 to P20 For details, see 7.3.2 DCDU-12A Input

Power Cable.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 223

NOTE
When the BTS3900L is configured with both RFUs and RRUs, the BBU and DCDU-12B are installed
below the lower DCDU-12A sequentially, and the LOAD0 to LOAD8 ports on the DCDU-12B feed power
to nine RRUs.

Power Cable Connections in the 220 V AC Scenario

The following figure shows the power cable connections in the 220 V AC scenario, using the
BTS3900L cabinet in full configuration as an example.

Figure 7-2 Power cable connections in the 220 V AC scenario

The following table describes the power cables.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 224

Table 7-8 Power cable connections

No. Description

P0 to P5, P10 to P15 For details, see RFU Power Cables.

P6 and P16 For details, see FAN 03C Power Cable.

P7 and P8 For details, see BBU Power Cable.

P9 For details, see EPU05A-02 Power Cable.

P17 For details, see GATM Power Cable.

P18 to P21 For details, see DCDU-12A Power Cable.

7.2.2 Transmission Cable Connections

This chapter describes the transmission cable connections for a BTS3900L in different modes.

Transmission Cable Connections for a Single-Mode Base Station

In GSM only, UMTS only, or LTE only mode, use the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE cable, or optical
cable to transmit data. This section describes transmission cable connections for each mode.

Configuration principles
l In LTE only mode, use preferentially the FE/GE optical cable to transmit data.

Application Scenario
Table 7-9 describes the transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station in
different transmission modes.

Table 7-9 Transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station

Trans Mode Application Scenario Legend

missi Supp
on orted
Mode

Trans GSM Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The "1" in the
missio Only transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on Figure 7-3
n over the GTMU. shows the cable
the E1 Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmission connections in
Cable cables are connected to the E1/T1 ports on the GTMU scenario 1.
and UTRP.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 225

Trans Mode Application Scenario Legend

missi Supp
on orted
Mode

UMTS Scenario 1: The UTRP is configured. The transmission "2" in the

Only cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. Figure 7-3
Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The shows the cable
transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on connections in
the WMPT or UMPT. scenario 1.

LTE The UMPT is configured. The transmission cable is "3" in the

Only connected to the E1/T1 port on the UMPT. Figure 7-3
shows the cable
connections.

Trans GSM Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The "4" in the

missio Only transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical Figure 7-3
n over port or electrical port on the UTRPc. shows the cable
the FE Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The connections in
Cable transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical scenario 1.
port on the GTMU.
Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. The
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical
port on the GTMU.

UMTS Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The "5" in the

Only transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical Figure 7-3
port or electrical port on the UTRPc. shows the cable
Scenario 2: The UTRP2 is configured. The connections in
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical scenario 1.
port on the UTRP2.
Scenario 3: The UTRP9 is configured. The
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical
port on the UTRP9.
Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. The
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical
port or electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT.

LTE Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The "6" in the

Only transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical Figure 7-3
port or electrical port on the UTRPc. shows the cable
Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The connections in
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical scenario 1.
port or electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT.

Figure 7-3 shows the cable connections supported by each mode.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 226

Figure 7-3 Transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station

T1: 7.4.1 E1/T1 Cable T2: 7.4.3 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable -

Transmission Cable Connections for a Dual-Mode Base Station in Common

Transmission Mode
In GSM+UMTS, GSM+LTE, or UMTS+LTE mode, common transmission can be used. This
section describes transmission cable connections for each mode.

Configuration Principles
l In GSM+UMTS mode using TDM common transmission, the transmission cables are
connected to the GTMU or the UTRP on the GTMU.
l In GSM+UMTS mode using IP common transmission, the transmission cables are
connected to the WMPT or UMPT, or the UTRP on the UMTS side.
l In GSM+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPT or
UMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side.
l In UMTS+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPT
or UMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side.

Application Scenario
Table 7-10 describes the transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in different
transmission modes.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 227

Table 7-10 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in common
transmission mode

Trans Mode Application Scenario Legend

missi Supp
on orted
Mode

TDM GSM Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The "1" in the
Comm +UMT transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on Figure 7-4
on S the GTMU. shows the cable
Trans Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmission connections in
missio cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. scenario 1.
n

IP GSM Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The "2" in the

Over +UMT transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on Figure 7-4
E1/T1 S the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT is shows the cable
Comm interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port connections in
on or optical port. scenario 1.
Trans Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmission
missio cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The
n WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using
the electrical port or optical port.

GSM The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable is "3" in the

+LTE connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The LMPT Figure 7-4
or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the shows the cable
electrical port or optical port. connections.

UMTS The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable is "4" in the

+LTE connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The LMPT Figure 7-4
or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT shows the cable
using the electrical port or optical port. connections.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 228

Trans Mode Application Scenario Legend

missi Supp
on orted
Mode

IP over GSM Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The "5" in the

FE/GE +UMT transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical Figure 7-4
Comm S port or electrical port on the UTRPc. shows the cable
on Scenario 2: The UTRP2 is configured. The connections in
Trans transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical scenario 1.
missio port on the UTRP2. The GTMU is interconnected to
n the UTRP using the optical port.
Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. The
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical
port on the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT is
interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port.
Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. The
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical
port on the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT is
interconnected to the GTMU using the optical port.
Scenario 5: The UTRP is not configured. The
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical
port or optical port on the WMPT or UMPT. The
WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU
through the backplane.

GSM Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The "6" in the

+LTE transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical Figure 7-4
port or electrical port on the UTRPc. shows the cable
Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The connections in
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical scenario 1.
port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is
interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port.
Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. The
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical
port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is
interconnected to the GTMU using the optical port.
Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. The
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical
port or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT
or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU through the
backplane.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 229

Trans Mode Application Scenario Legend

missi Supp
on orted
Mode

UMTS Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The "7" in the

+LTE transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical Figure 7-4
port or electrical port on the UTRPc. shows the cable
Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The connections in
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical scenario 1.
port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is
interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the
electrical port.
Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. The
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical
port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is
interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the
optical port.
Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. The
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical
port or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT
or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT
through the backplane.

Route GSM Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to "8" in the
Backu +UMT the electrical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and the Figure 7-4
p S GTMU. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the shows the cable
Mode GTMU using the optical port. connections in
with IP Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to scenario 1.
Comm the optical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and the
on GTMU. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the
Trans GTMU using the electrical port.
missio
n GSM Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to "9" in the
+LTE the electrical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the Figure 7-4
GTMU. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the shows the cable
GTMU using the optical port. connections in
Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to scenario 1.
the optical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the
GTMU. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the
GTMU using the electrical port.
Scenario 3: The transmission cables are connected to
the optical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the
GTMU. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the
GTMU through the backplane.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 230

Trans Mode Application Scenario Legend

missi Supp
on orted
Mode

UMTS Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to "10" in the

+LTE the electrical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the Figure 7-4
WMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is shows the cable
interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the connections in
optical port. scenario 1.
Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to
the optical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the
WMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is
interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the
optical port.

Hybrid UMTS Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to "11" in the
Trans +LTE the E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT and the FE/GE Figure 7-4
missio optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or shows the cable
n UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using connections in
the electrical port. scenario 1.
Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to
the E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT and the FE/GE
electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or
UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using
the optical port.

Figure 7-4 shows the cable connections supported by each mode.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 231

Figure 7-4 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in common
transmission mode

T1: 7.4.1 E1/T1 Cable T2: 7.4.4 Interconnection Cable T3: 7.4.3 FE/GE Fiber
Between the FE Electrical Ports Optic Cable

T4: 7.4.5 Interconnection Cable T5: 7.4.2 FE/GE Ethernet Cable -

Between FE Optical Ports

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 232

Transmission Cable Connections for a Dual-Mode Base Station in Non-Common

Transmission Mode
In GSM+UMTS, GSM+LTE, or UMTS+LTE mode, independent transmission can be used. This
section describes transmission cable connections for each mode.

Application Scenario
Table 7-11 describes the transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in different
transmission modes.

Table 7-11 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in non-common
transmission mode

Trans Mode Application Scenario Legend

missi Supp
on orted
Mode

GSM GU The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 "1" in the
E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT and the GTMU. Figure 7-5
+UMT shows the cable
S E1/ connections.
T1

GSM GU Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to "2" in the

FE/GE the FE optical port on the WMPT or UMPT and the Figure 7-5
+UMT GTMU. shows the cable
S FE/ Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to connections in
GE the FE electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT and the scenario 1.
GTMU.

GSM GL Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The "3" in the

E1/T1 transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 port on Figure 7-5
+LTE the GTMU and the FE optical or electrical port on the shows the cable
FE/GE LMPT or UMPT. connections in
Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured on the GSM side. scenario 1.
The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1
ports on the GTMU and UTRP and to the FE electrical
or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT.

UMTS GL Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to "4" in the

FE/GE the FE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT and the Figure 7-5
+LTE GTMU. shows the cable
FE/GE Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to connections in
the FE optical port on the LMPT or UMPT and FE scenario 1.
electrical port on the GTMU.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 233

Trans Mode Application Scenario Legend

missi Supp
on orted
Mode

UMTS UL Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The "5" in the

E1/T1 transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 port on Figure 7-5
+LTE the WMPT or UMPT and the FE optical or electrical shows the cable
FE/GE port on the LMPT or UMPT. connections in
Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured on the UMTS scenario 1.
side. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1
port on the UTRP and to the FE electrical or optical
port on the LMPT or UMPT.

UMTS UL Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to "6" in the

FE/GE the FE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT and the Figure 7-5
+LTE WMPT or UMPT. shows the cable
FE/GE Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to connections in
the FE optical port on the LMPT or UMPT and FE scenario 1.
electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT.

Figure 7-5 shows the cable connections supported by each mode.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 234

Figure 7-5 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in non-common
transmission mode

T1: 7.4.1 E1/T1 Cable T3: 7.4.3 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable

T5: 7.4.2 FE/GE Ethernet Cable -

Transmission Cable Connections for a Triple-Mode Base Station

This section describes the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.

In this document, the two BBUs are described as BBU0 and BBU1 for better understanding.
l In an expanded base station, BBU0 is the BBU installed during the initial site construction,
and BBU1 is the BBU installed during the capacity expansion.
l In a new base station, BBU0 is the BBU working in GSM+UMTS or GSM+LTE mode,
and BBU1 is the BBU working in LTE Only or UMTS Only mode.
l The difference between the GL+UO scenario and UO+GL scenario is as follows: the GL
+UO scenario is applicable to both an expanded base station and a new base station, while
the UO+GL scenario is applicable only to an expanded base station.

Application Scenario
Table 7-12 shows the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 235

Table 7-12 Transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station

Triple-Mode Scenario Mode Specification Reference

GU (BBU 0)+LO (BBU 1) BBU 0 works in GSM l Dual-mode includes

(BBU Not Cascaded) +UMTS mode and BBU 1 common and non-
works in LTE only mode. common transmission.
For details, see the
GL (BBU 0)+UO (BBU 1) BBU 0 works in GSM+LTE Transmission Cable
(BBU Not Cascaded) mode and BBU 1 works in Connections for a Dual-
UMTS only mode. Mode Base Station in
UO (BBU 0)+GL (BBU 1) BBU 0 works in UMTS only Common Transmission
(BBU Not Cascaded) mode and BBU 1 works in Mode and the
GSM+LTE mode. Transmission Cable
Connections for a Dual-
GO (BBU 0)+UL (BBU 1) BBU 0 works in GSM only Mode Base Station in
(BBU Not Cascaded) mode and BBU 1 works in Non-Common
UMTS+LTE mode. Transmission Mode.
l For details about the
transmission cable
connections for a single-
mode base station, see the
Transmission Cable
Connections for a
Single-Mode Base
Station.

GU (BBU 0)+LO (BBU 1) BBU 0 works in GSM For details, see the "1" or
(BBU Cascaded) +UMTS mode and BBU 1 "2" in the Figure 7-6
works in LTE only mode.

GL (BBU 0)+UO (BBU 1) BBU 0 works in GSM+LTE For details, see the "3" or
(BBU Cascaded) mode and BBU 1 works in "4" in the Figure 7-6
UMTS only mode.

GU (BBU 0)+UL (BBU 1) BBU 0 works in GSM For details, see the "5" in the
(BBU Cascaded) +UMTS mode and BBU 1 Figure 7-6
works in UMTS+LTE mode.

Figure 7-6 shows the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 236

Figure 7-6 Transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station

T1:7.4.3 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable

7.2.3 CPRI Cable Connections

CPRI cables are connected in star or chain topology. In star topology, each RFU is connected
to the BBU separately. In chain topology, RFUs are cascaded before being connected to the
BBU.

CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM Only Base Station

This section describes the CPRI cable connections for a base station in GSM only mode.

CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM Only Base Station which is configured with
only RFUs
Figure 7-7 shows the cable connections in the following situation: The GRFU/DRFU work in
dual-band mode serving three sectors with different bands in the star and chain topology.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 237

Figure 7-7 CPRI cable connections (1)

Figure 7-8 shows the cable connections in the following situation: The GRFU/DRFU work in
dual-band mode serving three sectors. Each band serves for three sectors and a pair of two
GRFUs/DRFUs working in the same sector with different bands are cascaded.

Figure 7-8 CPRI cable connections (2)

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 238

CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM Only Base Station which is configured with
RFUs and RRUs
The GRFUs/DRFUs work in single-band mode and serve three sectors. The GRFUs/DRFUs in
the same sector are cascaded. The RRU3004s/RRU3008s work in single-band mode, serve three
sectors, and are connected in the star topology. Figure 7-9shows the CPRI cable connections in
this scenario.

NOTE

l If RFUs and RRUs can work in GSM mode, the GTMUb must be configured in a BBU3900. The RFUs
working in GSM mode are connected to the GTMUb, and the RRUs working in GSM mode are
connected to the UBRI.

Figure 7-9 CPRI cable connections (3)

CPRI Cable Connections for a UMTS Only Base Station

This section describes the CPRI cable connections for a base station in UMTS only mode.

CPRI Cable Connections for a UMTS Only Base Station which is configured with
only RFUs
Figure 7-10 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The WRFUs work in
single-band mode, serve for a maximum of three sectors, and do not support MIMO.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 239

Figure 7-10 CPRI cable connections (1)

Figure 7-11 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The WRFU works in
single-band mode with serving for a maximum of three sectors and supports MIMO or supports
expanded bandwidth and carriers. Two WRFUs working in the same sector are cascaded.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 240

Figure 7-11 CPRI cable connections (2)

CPRI Cable Connections for a UMTS Only Base Station which is configured with
RFUs and RRUs
The RFUs and RFUs work in single-band mode. The WRFUs serve three sectors, and support
MIMO configuration or support expanded bandwidth and carriers. The WRFUs in the same
sector are cascaded. The RRU3804s serve three sectors and are connected in the star topology.

Figure 7-12shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 241

Figure 7-12 CPRI cable connections (3)

CPRI Cable Connections for an LTE Only Base Station

This section describes the CPRI cable connections for a base station in LTE only mode.

CPRI Cable Connections for a LTE Only Base Station which is configured with
only RFUs
Figure 7-13 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRUs work in
single-band mode, use 10 MHz or 20 MHz bandwidth, support 2T2R MIMO, and the base station
serves for a maximum of three sectors.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 242

Figure 7-13 CPRI cable connections (1)

Figure 7-14 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The LRFUs work in
single-band mode, use 10 MHz bandwidth, support 4T4R MIMO, and each pair of RFUs serve
one sector.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 243

Figure 7-14 CPRI cable connections (2)

Figure 7-15 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The LRFUs work in
single-band mode, use 20 MHz bandwidth, support 4T4R MIMO, and each pair of RFUs serve
one sector.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 244

Figure 7-15 CPRI cable connections (3)

Figure 7-16 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The MRFUs work in
single-band mode, use 20 MHz bandwidth, support 2T2R MIMO, and each pair of MRFUs serve
one sector.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 245

Figure 7-16 CPRI cable connections (4)

CPRI Cable Connections for a LTE Only Base Station which is configured with
RFUs and RRUs
The LRFUs work in single-band mode, use 20 MHz bandwidth, and support 4T4R MIMO. The
LRFUs serve three sectors, and each pair of LRFUs serve one sector. The RRU3221s work in
single-band mode, use 20 MHz bandwidth, and support 2T2R MIMO. The RRU3221s serve
three sectors.

Figure 7-17 shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 246

Figure 7-17 CPRI cable connections (5)

CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM+UMTS Base Station

This section describes the CPRI cable connections for a base station in GSM+UMTS mode.

CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM+UMTS Base Station which is configured with
only RFUs
Figure 7-18 shows the CPRI cable connections when the MRFUs work in single-band mode
and support MIMO. MRFUs working in dual-star topology support three sectors.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 247

Figure 7-18 CPRI cable connections (1)

Figure 7-19 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situations: The DRFUs/GRFUs
work in single-band mode, serve six sectors, and work in star topology. WRFUs work in single-
band mode, support three sectors and two WRFUs in the same sector are cascaded.

Figure 7-19 CPRI cable connections (3)

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 248

CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM+UMTS Base Station which is configured with
RFUs and RRUs
Figure 7-20shows the CPRI cable connections when a GU base station is configured with RFUs
and RRUs and meets the following conditions
l The GRFUs/DRFUs work in single-band mode and serve three sectors. Two GRFUs/
DRFUs in the same sector are cascaded.
l The RRU3908s work in single-band mode, serve three sectors, and are connected in the
dual-star topology.

Figure 7-20 CPRI cable connections (4)

CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM+LTE Base Station

This section describes the CPRI cable connections for a base station in GSM+LTE mode.

CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM+LTE Base Station which is configured with
only RFUs
Figure 7-21 shows the CPRI cable connections when the MRFUs with a dual-star topology work
in single-band mode and serve for three sectors.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 249

Figure 7-21 CPRI cable connections (1)

Figure 7-22 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situations: The DRFUs/GRFUs
work in single-band mode and two pairs of DRFUs/GRFUs in the same sector are cascaded. The
LRFUs with a dual-star topology work in single-band mode, serve for three sectors and support
2T2R MIMO.

Figure 7-22 CPRI cable connections (2)

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 250

CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM+LTE Base Station which is configured with
RFUs and RRUs
Figure 7-23shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.
l The GRFUs/DRFUs work in single-band mode, and serve three sectors. The GRFUs/
DRFUs in the same sector are cascaded.
l The RRU3908s work in single-band mode, serve three sectors, and are connected in the
dual-star topology.
NOTE
If RFUs and RRUs can work in GSM mode, the GTMUb must be configured in a BBU3900. The RFUs
working in GSM mode are connected to the GTMUb, and the RRUs working in GSM mode are connected
to the UBRI.

Figure 7-23 CPRI cable connections (3)

CPRI Cable Connections for a UMTS+LTE Base Station

This section describes the CPRI cable connections for a base station in UMTS+LTE mode.

CPRI Cable Connections for a UMTS+LTE Base Station which is configured with
only RFUs
Figure 7-24 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situations: The WRFUs work
in single-band mode, serve for a maximum of three sectors, and do not support MIMO. The

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 251

LRFUs with a star topology work in single-band mode, use 10 MHz bandwidth, and support
2T2R MIMO.

Figure 7-24 CPRI cable connections (1)

Figure 7-25 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situations: The WRFUs work
in single-band mode, serve for a maximum of three sectors, and do not support MIMO. Three
LRFUs with a star topology in the upper part of the cabinet work in single-band mode, use 20
MHz bandwidth, support 2T2R MIMO. Six LRFUs with a star topology in the lower part of the
cabinet work in single-band mode, use 10 MHz bandwidth, serve for three sectors and 4T4R
MIMO.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 252

Figure 7-25 CPRI cable connections (2)

Figure 7-26 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situations: The WRFUs work
in single-band mode, serve for a maximum of three sectors, and support MIMO. The LRFUs
with a star topology work in dual-band mode, use 20 MHz bandwidth, and support 2T2R MIMO.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 253

Figure 7-26 CPRI cable connections (3)

CPRI Cable Connections for a UMTS+LTE Base Station which is configured with
RFUs and RRUs
l The WRFUs work in dual-band mode. Both the WRFUs working in the high frequency
band and the WRFUs working in the low frequency band serve three sectors. The WRFUs
are connected in the star topology.
l The RRU3221s work in single-band mode, serve three sectors, use 10 MHz bandwidth,
support 2T2R MIMO, and are connected in the star topology.

Figure 7-27 shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 254

Figure 7-27 CPRI cable connections (4)

CPRI Cable Connections for a Triple-Mode Base Station

This section describes the CPRI cable connections for a triple-mode scenario base station.

A triple-mode scenario solution can support the following scenarios: GU+LO (BBUs not
cascaded), GL+UO (BBUs not cascaded), UO+GL (BBUs not cascaded), and GU+L(UCIU
+UMPT).

A single baseband unit (BBU) can support a maximum of two modes, and two BBUs are required
for a Triple-mode base station.

GU+LO (BBUs not Cascaded)

In the GU+LO (BBUs not cascaded) scenario, BBU 0 works in GSM+UMTS mode. CPRI
Cable Connections for a GSM+UMTS Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in
this scenario.

In the GU+LO (BBUs not cascaded) scenario, BBU 1 works in LTE only mode. CPRI Cable
Connections for an LTE Only Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.

GL+UO (BBUs not Cascaded)

In the GL+UO (BBUs not cascaded) scenario, BBU 0 works in GSM+LTE mode. CPRI Cable
Connections for a GSM+LTE Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 255

In the GL+UO (BBUs not cascaded) scenario, BBU 1 works in UMTS only mode. CPRI Cable
Connections for a UMTS Only Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this
scenario.

UO+GL (BBUs not Cascaded)

In the UO+GL (BBUs not cascaded) scenario, BBU 0 works in UMTS only mode. CPRI Cable
Connections for a UMTS Only Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this
scenario.
In the GL+UO (BBUs not cascaded) scenario, BBU 1 works in GSM+LTE mode. CPRI Cable
Connections for a GSM+LTE Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.

GU+L(UCIU+UMPT)
In the GU+L(UCIU+UMPT) scenario, BBU 0 and BBU 1 are interconnected by UCIU and
UMPT to support the GSM, UMTS, and LTE modes. Figure 7-28 shows the CPRI cable
connections in this scenario.

Figure 7-28 CPRI cable connections in the GU+L(UCIU+UMPT) scenario

In the GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) scenario where the base station is configured with RFUs and
RRUs, BBU 0 and BBU 1 are interconnected by UCIU and UMPT to support the GSM, UMTS,
and LTE modes. Figure 7-29 shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 256

Figure 7-29 CPRI cable connections in the GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) scenario

7.2.4 RF Cable Connections

This section describes the RF cable connections for a BTS3900L configured with different RF
modules.

RF Cable Connections for DRFUs

The DRFU supports two carriers.

The following description is based on the RF cable connections for DRFUs with a single sector.

Cable Connections in 1T2R Mode

With one TX channel and two RX channels, the following items are configured for one carrier:
l A pair of dual-polarized antennas
l One DRFU
Figure 7-30 describes the RF cable connections.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 257

Figure 7-30 Cable connections in 1T2R mode (1)

With one TX channel and two RX channels, the following items are configured for two carriers:
l A pair of dual-polarized antennas
l One DRFU
Figure 7-30 shows the RF cable connections.

With one TX channel and two RX channels, the following items are configured for four carriers:
l A pair of dual-polarized antennas
l Two DRFUs
Figure 7-31 describes the RF cable connections.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 258

Figure 7-31 Cable connections in 1T2R mode (2)

Cable Connections in 2T2R Mode

With two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured for one carrier:
l A pair of dual-polarized antennas
l One DRFU
Figure 7-30 shows the RF cable connections.

With two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured for two carriers:
l A pair of dual-polarized antennas
l Two DRFUs
Figure 7-31 shows the RF cable connections.

RF Cable Connections for GRFUs

The GRFU supports six carriers.

The following description is based on the RF cable connections for GRFUs with a single sector.

The GRFU supports only the 1T2R configuration.

Cable Connections with Three Carriers

The following items are configured for three carriers:

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 259

l A pair of dual-polarized antennas

l One GRFU
Figure 7-32 describes the RF cable connections.

Figure 7-32 Cable connections with three carriers

Cable Connections with Nine Carriers

The following items are configured for nine carriers:
l A pair of dual-polarized antennas
l Two GRFUs
Figure 7-33 describes the RF cable connections.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 260

Figure 7-33 Cable Connections with Nine Carriers

Cable Connections with 14 Carriers

The following items are configured for 14 carriers:
l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennas
l Three GRFUs
Figure 7-34 describes the RF cable connections.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 261

Figure 7-34 Cable connections with 14 carriers

Cable Connections with 24 Carriers

The following items are configured for 24 carriers:
l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennas
l Four GRFUs
Figure 7-35 describes the RF cable connections.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 262

Figure 7-35 Cable connections with 24 carriers

RF Cable Connections for WRFUs

The WRFU supports four carriers.

The following description is based on the RF cable connections for WRFUs with a single sector.

Cable Connections in 1T2R Mode

With one TX channel and two RX channels, the following items are configured for one to four
carriers:
l A pair of dual-polarized antennas
l One WRFU
Figure 7-36 describes the RF cable connections.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 263

Figure 7-36 Cable connections in 1T2R mode (1)

With one TX channel and two RX channels, the following items are configured for five to eight
carriers:
l A pair of dual-polarized antennas
l Two WRFUs
Figure 7-37 describes the RF cable connections.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 264

Figure 7-37 Cable connections in 1T2R mode (2)

Cable Connections in 2T2R Mode

With two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured for one to four
carriers:
l A pair of dual-polarized antennas
l Two WRFUs
Figure 7-37 shows the RF cable connections.

Cable Connections in 2T4R Mode

With two TX channels and four RX channels, the following items are configured for one to four
carriers:
l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennas
l Two WRFUs
Figure 7-38 describes the RF cable connections.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 265

Figure 7-38 Cable connections in 2T4R mode

Cable Connections in 2x2 MIMO Mode

The base station in UMTS only mode supports 2x2 MIMO. Figure 7-37 shows the cable
connections.

RF Cable Connections for the WRFUa

RF cable connections for the WRFUa vary according to the positions of the WRFUa and antenna.

Cable Connections
This section describes the RF cable connections for the WRFUa with a single sector. The
following table lists the RF cable connections for the WRFUa.

Table 7-13 RF cable connections for the WRFUa

RFU Specifications of a Description Illustration

Model Single RFU

WRFUa Four carriers with 1T2R Four carriers with 1T2R See illustration 1 in
Figure 7-39.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 266

RFU Specifications of a Description Illustration

Model Single RFU

l Four carriers with See illustration 2 in

2T2R Figure 7-39.
l Eight carriers with
1T2R
l 2x2 MIMO

Four carriers with 2T4R See illustration 3 in

Figure 7-39.

Illustration of Cable Connections

Figure 7-39 RF cable connections for the WRFUa

RF Cable Connections for WRFUd

The WRFUd supports a maximum of six carriers.

The following description is based on the RF cable connections for WRFUds with a single sector.

Cable Connections in 2T2R Mode

With two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured for one to four
carriers:
l A pair of dual-polarized antennas

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 267

l One WRFUd
Figure 7-40 shows the RF cable connections.

Figure 7-40 Cable connections in 2T2R (I)

With two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured for five to eight
carriers:
l A pair of dual-polarized antennas
l Two WRFUds.

Cable Connections in 4T4R Mode

With four TX channels and four RX channels, the following items are configured for one to four
carriers:
l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennas
l Two WRFUds
Figure 7-41 shows the RF cable connections.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 268

Figure 7-41 Cable connections in 4T4R mode (II)

RF Cable Connections for WRFUe

The WRFUe supports a maximum of six carriers.

The following description is based on the RF cable connections for WRFUes with a single sector.

Cable Connections in 2T2R Mode

With two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured for one to four
carriers:
l A pair of dual-polarized antennas
l One WRFUe
Figure 7-42 shows the RF cable connections.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 269

Figure 7-42 Cable connections in 2T2R (I)

With two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured for five to eight
carriers:
l A pair of dual-polarized antennas
l Two WRFUes.

Cable Connections in 4T4R Mode

With four TX channels and four RX channels, the following items are configured for one to four
carriers:
l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennas
l Two WRFUes
Figure 7-43 shows the RF cable connections.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 270

Figure 7-43 Cable connections in 4T4R mode (II)

RF Cable Connections for LRFUs

The LRFU supports a single carrier.

The following description is based on the RF cable connections for LRFUs supporting a single
sector.

The LRFU supports only the 2T2R configuration.

RF Cable Connections in 2T2R Mode

In 2T2R mode, the following items are configured:
l A dual-polarized antenna
l An LRFU
Figure 7-44 shows RF cable connections.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 271

Figure 7-44 RF cable connections in 2T2R mode

RF Cable Connections in 4T4R mode

In 4T4R mode, the following items are configured:
l Two dual-polarized antennas
l Two LRFUs
Figure 7-45 shows RF cable connections.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 272

Figure 7-45 RF cable connections in 4T4R mode

RF Cable Connections for LRFUe

The LRFUe supports one carrier.

The following description is based on the RF cable connections for LRFUes with a single sector.

Cable Connections in 2T2R Mode

With two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured for one to four
carriers:
l A pair of dual-polarized antennas
l One LRFUe
Figure 7-46 shows the RF cable connections.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 273

Figure 7-46 Cable connections in 2T2R (I)

Cable Connections in 4T4R Mode

With four TX channels and four RX channels, the following items are configured for one to four
carriers:
l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennas
l Two LRFUes
Figure 7-47 shows the RF cable connections.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 274

Figure 7-47 Cable connections in 4T4R mode (II)

RF Cable Connections for MRFUs

The MRFU supports six carriers.

The following description is based on the RF cable connections for MRFUs with a single sector.

The MRFU supports only the 1T2R configuration.

RF Cable Connections in G4U2 Mode

When the GSM system is configured with four carriers and the UMTS system is configured with
two carriers, the following items are required:
l A pair of dual-polarized antennas
l One MRFU
Figure 7-48 shows the RF cable connections in G4U2 mode.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 275

Figure 7-48 RF cable connections in G4U2 mode

RF Cable Connections in G6U2 Mode

When the GSM system is configured with six carriers and the UMTS system is configured with
two carriers, the following items are required:
l A pair of dual-polarized antennas
l Two MRFUs
Figure 7-49 shows the RF cable connections in G6U2 mode.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 276

Figure 7-49 RF cable connections in G6U2 mode

RF Cable Connections in Single-mode Scenarios

In GSM only mode, a single MRFU supports a maximum of six carriers. Figure 7-48 shows the
corresponding RF cable connections.

In UMTS only mode, a single MRFU supports a maximum of four carriers. Figure 7-48 shows
the corresponding RF cable connections.

RF Cable Connections for MRFUd

The MRFUd supports a maximum of eight GSM carriers, six UMTS carriers, or two LTE
carriers.

The following description is based on the RF cable connections for MRFUds with a single sector.

Cable Connections in 2T2R Mode

With two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured:
l A pair of dual-polarized antennas
l One MRFUd
Figure 7-50 shows the RF cable connections.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 277

Figure 7-50 Cable connections in 2T2R

Cable Connections in 4T4R Mode

With four TX channels and four RX channels, the following items are configured:
l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennas
l Two MRFUds
Figure 7-51 shows the RF cable connections.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 278

Figure 7-51 Cable connections in 4T4R mode

RF Cable Connections for MRFUe

The MRFUe supports a maximum of eight GSM carriers, four UMTS carriers, or two LTE
carriers.

The following description is based on the RF cable connections for MRFUes with a single sector.

Cable Connections in 1T2R Mode

With one TX channel and two RX channels, the following items are configured:
l A pair of dual-polarized antennas
l One MRFUe
Figure 7-52 shows the RF cable connections.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 279

Figure 7-52 Cable connections in 1T2R

Cable Connections in 2T2R Mode

With two TX channel and two RX channels, the following items are configured:
l A pair of dual-polarized antennas
l Two MRFUes
Figure 7-53 shows the RF cable connections.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 280

Figure 7-53 Cable connections in 2T2R

Cable Connections in 2T4R Mode

With two TX channels and four RX channels, the following items are configured:
l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennas
l Two MRFUes
Figure 7-54 shows the RF cable connections.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 281

Figure 7-54 Cable connections in 2T4R mode (II)

RF Cable Connections for CRFUd

The CRFUd supports a single carrier.

The following description is based on the RF cable connections for CRFUd with a single sector.

Cable Connections in 2T2R Mode

In 2T2R mode, the following items are configured:
l A pair of dual-polarized antennas
l One CRFUd
Figure 7-55 shows RF cable connections.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 282

Figure 7-55 RF cable connections in 2T2R mode

RF Cable Connections in 4T4R mode

In 4T4R mode, the following items are configured:
l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennas
l Two CRFUds
Figure 7-56 shows RF cable connections.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 283

Figure 7-56 RF cable connections in 4T4R mode

RF Cable Connections for Mixed RFU Configuration

Different models of RFUs can be configured in the same base station to expand the system
capacity or supports multimode radio access technologies (RATs). This section describes the
RF cable connections for mixed RFU configuration.

Cable Connections

Table 7-14 RF cable connections for mixed RFU configuration

Initial Scenario Mixed Configuration Illustration

Scenario

In UMTS 3x2 mode, each In UMTS 3x6 mode, each See illustration 1 in Figure
sector is configured with one sector is configured with one 7-57.
WRFU of 40 W. This WRFU WRFU of 80 W. This WRFU
supports two UMTS carriers. supports four UMTS carriers.

In GSM S4/4/4 mode, each To support 3x5 MHz of LTE, See illustration 2 in Figure
sector is configured with one one MRFU V2 is added to 7-57.
MRFU V1 that supports four each sector. The MRFU V2
GSM carriers. and MRFU V1 are configured
to support one LTE carrier.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 284

Initial Scenario Mixed Configuration Illustration

Scenario

In GSM S8/8/8 mode, each To support GSM S8/8/8+LTE See illustration 3 in Figure
sector is configured with two 3x15 MHz, one GRFU V2 7-57.
GRFU V2 (1800 MHz). Each (1800 MHz) in each sector is
GRFU V2 (1800 MHz) replaced with one MRFUd
supports four GSM carriers. (1800 MHz). The MRFUd
(1800 MHz) works in GL
mode, supporting four GSM
carriers and one LTE carrier.

Illustration of Cable Connections

Figure 7-57 RF cable connections for mixed RFU configuration

7.2.5 Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connections

Two BBUs in a triple-mode base station can be cascaded to expand the mode supporting
capability, two BBUs in a single-mode base station can be cascaded to expand the service
processing capability of a single mode.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 285

NOTE
When two BBUs in a base station are cascaded to achieve the GUL triple-mode, BBU0 is the root BBU,
and BBU1 is the leaf BBU.

UCIU+UMPT
In a triple-mode base station, the UCIU in BBU0 can be connected to the UMPT in BBU1 to
achieve the GUL triple-mode. In a UMTS only base station, the UCIU in BBU0 can be connected
to the UMPT in BBU1 to expand the UMTS service processing capacity. Any port from M0 to
M4 on the UCIU in BBU0 can be connected to the CI port on the UMPT in BBU1, as shown
in Figure 7-58.
NOTE
In UCIU+UMPT mode, the UMPT must be configured as the main control board of BBU1. Table 7-15
lists the BBU configurations in UCIU+UMPT mode.

Table 7-15 BBU configurations

Scenario Description BBU0 BBU1

Triple-Mode Scenario GU L

GL U

GU UL

Single-Mode Scenario U U

Figure 7-58 Signal cable connection between the UCIU and the UMPT

WBBPf+WBBPf
In the UCIU+UMPT mode, the WBBPfs in the two BBUs can be connected to transmit baseband
data. As shown in Figure 7-58, the HEI ports on the WBBPfs in BBU0 and BBU1 are connected.
NOTE
In SRAN7.0, only the WBBPf in slot 2 or 3 of a BBU can be connected to the WBBPf in another BBU.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 286

Figure 7-59 Signal cable connection between the WBBPfs

7.2.6 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections

This section describes the monitoring signal cable connections for a BTS3900L.

NOTE
When two BBUs (BBU 0 and BBU 1) are configured in a base station, all monitoring signal cables are
connected to the root BBU (BBU 0). Therefore, the monitoring signal cable connections in a base station
configured with two BBUs are the same as those in a base station configured with one BBU. This section
uses a base station configured with two BBUs as an example.

Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the -48 V DC Scenario

Figure 7-60 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in the -48 V DC scenario.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 287

Figure 7-60 Monitoring signal cable connections for a BTS3900L cabinet

Table 7-16 describes the monitoring signal cable connections for a BTS3900L cabinet.

Table 7-16 Monitoring signal cables in a BTS3900L cabinet

Cable No. Cable Description

S1 For details, see 7.5.9 Signal Cable for the

ELU.

S2 For details, see 7.5.3 Fan Assembly Cascade

Signal Cable.

S3 For details, see 7.5.2 Monitoring Signal

Cable for the Fan Assembly.

S4 and S5 For details, see 7.5.10 Monitoring Signal

Cable for the GATM.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 288

Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the 220 V AC Scenario

The following figure shows the power cable connections in the 220 V AC scenario.

Figure 7-61 Monitoring signal cable connections in the 220 V AC scenario

The following table describes the monitoring signal cable connections.

Table 7-17 Monitoring signal cables in BTS3900L

No. Description

S1 For details, see ELU Signal Cable.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 289

No. Description

S2 For details, see Monitoring Signal Cable

Between Cascaded FAN 03C Units.

S3 For details, see PMU 11A-BBU Monitoring

Signal Cable.

7.3 Power Cables

This chapter describes power cables in a BTS3900L, including the input power cable for the
cabinet, BBU power cable, fan assembly power cable, and RFU power cable.

7.3.1 EPU05A-02 Power Cable

An EPU05A-02 power cable feeds external AC power into the power system of a cabinet. The
maximum length of an EPU05A-02 power cable is 15 m (49.21 ft).

Exterior
For different types of AC input, EPU05A-02 power cables consist of different numbers of core
wires. Figure 7-62 shows the EPU05A-02 power cables.

Figure 7-62 EPU05A-02 power cables

(1) OT terminal

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 290

NOTE

The colors and structures of cables delivered by Huawei vary according to countries and areas. If cables
are purchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.

Specifications
Table 7-18 lists the specifications of the EPU05A-02 power cables.

Table 7-18 Specifications of the EPU05A-02 power cables

Cable Exterior Cable Wire Color Cross-sectional

Area

See illustration 1. EPU05A-02 L1 Brown 6 mm2 (0.009 in.2)

power cable in a
220 V AC three- L2 Black
phase scenario L3 Gray

N Blue

PE Green and
yellow

See illustration 2. EPU05A-02 L Brown 25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)

power cable in a
220 V AC single- N Blue
phase scenario PE Green and
yellow

7.3.2 DCDU-12A Input Power Cable

The DCDU-12A feeds -48 V DC power into all components in the cabinet. In a BTS3900L DC
cabinet, the DCDU-12A input power cable feeds -48 V DC power from the external power
equipment into the cabinet. The maximum length of a DCDU-12A input power cable is 15 m
(49.21 ft). In a BTS3900L AC cabinet, the DCDU-12A input power cable feeds -48 V DC power
from the AC/DC power system into the cabinet.

Exterior
Figure 7-63 shows the DCDU-12A input power cable.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 291

Figure 7-63 DCDU-12A input power cable

(1) OT terminal

Cable Description
Table 7-19 and Table 7-20 describe DCDU-12A input power cables.

Table 7-19 DCDU-12A input power cable

Power Supply Cable Color Cross- Size of the

sectional OT
Area Terminal

External power RTN(+) Black 1x160 A: 35 M6

equipment mm2 (0.054 in.
NEG(-) Blue 2)

2x80 A: 16
mm2 (0.025 in.
2)

Table 7-20 DCDU-12A input power cable

Power Supply Cable Color Cross- Size of the

sectional OT
Area Terminal

AC/DC power RTN(+) Black 2x16 mm2 M6

system in the (0.025 in.2)
cabinet NEG(-) Blue

7.3.3 (Optional) DCDU-12B Input Power Cable

The DCDU-12B input power cable feeds -48 V DC power from external power equipment to
the DCDU-12B.

Exterior
Figure 7-64 shows a DCDU-12B input power cable.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 292

Figure 7-64 DCDU-12B input power cable

(1) OT terminal

Cable Description
Table 7-21 describes a DCDU-12B input power cable.

Table 7-21 Specifications of a DCDU-12B input power cable

Power Cable Color Color Cross- Size of

Supply (Global) (Britain) sectional the OT
Area Terminal

External RTN(+) Black Blue 1x160 A: M6

power 35 mm2
equipment NEG(-) Blue Gray
(0.054 in.2)
2x80 A: 16
mm2
(0.025 in.2)

7.3.4 BBU Power Cable

The BBU power cable feeds power into a BBU.

Exterior
A BBU power cable has a 3V3 connector at one end and an EPC4 connector at the other end,
as shown in Figure 7-65 and Figure 7-66.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 293

Figure 7-65 Exterior of a BBU power cable (1)

(1) 3V3 connector (2) EPC4 connector

Figure 7-66 Exterior of a BBU power cable (2)

(1) 3V3 connector (2) EPC4 connector

Table 7-22 lists the specifications of the cable.

Table 7-22 Specifications of the input power cable for BBU power cable

Cable Wire Wire Color in Most Wire Color in Other

Regions Regions (UK)

BBU power cable RTN(+) Black Blue

NEG(-) Black Gray

Pin Assignment
A BBU power cable consists of two wires. Table 7-23 describes the pin assignment for the wires
of a BBU power cable.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 294

Table 7-23 Pin assignment for the wires of a BBU power cable

Wire X1 End X2 End

W1 X1.A1 X2.2

W2 X1.A3 X2.1

7.3.5 Fan Assembly Power Cable

The fan assembly power cable feeds -48 V DC power from the DCDU-12A into the fan assembly.

Exterior
Figure 7-67 and Figure 7-68 shows a fan assembly power cable.

Figure 7-67 Exterior of a Fan assembly power cable (1)

(1) 3V3 connector (2) EPC4 connector

Figure 7-68 Exterior of a Fan assembly power cable (2)

(1) 3V3 connector (2) EPC4 connector

Table 7-24 lists the specifications of the cable.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 295

Table 7-24 Specifications of the fan assembly power cable

Cable Wire Wire Color in Most Wire Color in Other

Regions Regions (UK)

Fan Assembly RTN(+) Black Blue

Power Cable
NEG(-) Black Gray

Pin Assignment
A fan assembly power cable consists of two wires. Table 7-25 describes the pin assignment for
the fan assembly power cable.

Table 7-25 Pin assignment for the fan assembly power cable

Wire X1 End X2 End

W1 X1.A1 X2.2

W2 X1.A3 X2.1

7.3.6 RFU Power Cable

The RFU power cable feeds -48 V DC power from the DCDU-12A into the RFU.

Exterior
An RFU power cable has a 3V3 connector at one end and an EPC4 connector at the other end,
as shown in Figure 7-69 and Figure 7-70.

Figure 7-69 Exterior of an RFU power cable (1)

(1) 3V3 connector (2) EPC4 connector

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 296

Figure 7-70 Exterior of a RFU power cable (2)

(1) 3V3 connector (2) EPC4 connector

Table 7-26 lists the specifications of the cable.

Table 7-26 Specifications of the input power cable for RFU power cable

Cable Wire Wire Color in Most Wire Color in Other

Regions Regions (UK)

RFU power cable RTN(+) Black Blue

NEG(-) Black Gray

Pin Assignment
An RFU power cable consists of two wires. Table 7-27 describes the pin assignment for the
wires of a RFU power cable.

Table 7-27 Pin assignment for the wires of an RFU power cable

Wire X1 End X2 End

W1 X1.A1 X2.2

W2 X1.A3 X2.1

7.3.7 RRU Power Cable

The RRU power cable feeds -48 V DC power into the RRU.

Cable type
RRU power cables vary according to the power equipment. The following table describes
different types of RRU power cables.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 297

Table 7-28 Types of RRU power cables

Power Equipment Connector on Connector Exterior

the Power on the RRU
Equipment Side
Side

DCDU-11B, EPS Tool-less female Depending on The exterior is shown by

01A or EPS 01C, connector the RRU illustration 1 in the following
EPS 01B or EPS 01, (pressfit type) model figure.
and EPU03A-02 or
EPU03A-04

DCDU-12B EPC4 or EPC5 The exterior of an EPC4

PDU10D-01, and connector connector is shown by
EPU05A-02 or illustration 2 in the following
EPU05A-04 figure. The exterior of an EPC5
connector is shown by
illustration 3 in the following
figure.

DCDU-03B OT terminal The exterior is shown by

(M4) illustration 4 in the following
figure.

Exterior
The following figure shows the exteriors of RRU power cables.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 298

Figure 7-71 Exteriors of RRU power cables

(1) Tool-less female connector (2) EPC4 connector (3) EPC5 connector (4) OT terminal
(pressfit type)

Description
The following table describes RRU power cables.

Table 7-29 RRU power cables

Wire Color

North American Standard European Standard

RTN(+) Black Brown

NEG(-) Blue Blue

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 299

NOTE

l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables are purchased
locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.
l The type of connector at the other end of an RRU power cable depends on the type of the RRU to which
the power cable is connected. For how to add a connector to an RRU power cable, see the related RRU
installation guide.

7.3.8 GATM Power Cable

The GATM power cable feeds -48 V DC power from the DCDU-12A into the GATM.

Exterior
The GATM power cable has a 3V3 connector at one end and an EPC4 connector at the other
end, as shown in Figure 7-72.

Figure 7-72 Exterior of a GATM power cable (1)

(1) 3V3 connector (2) EPC4 connector

Figure 7-73 Exterior of a GATM power cable (2)

(1) 3V3 connector (2) EPC4 connector

Table 7-30 lists the specifications of the cable.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 300

Table 7-30 Specifications of the GATM Power Cable

Cable Wire Wire Color in Most Wire Color in Other

Regions Regions (UK)

GATM Power RTN(+) Black Blue

Cable
NEG(-) Black Gray

Pin Assignment
Table 7-31 describes the pin assignment for the wires of a GATM Power Cable.

Table 7-31 Pin assignment for the GATM Power Cable

Wire X1 End X2 End

W1 X1.A1 X2.2

W2 X1.A3 X2.1

7.4 Transmission Cables

This chapter describes the transmission cables in a BTS3900L, including the E1/T1 signal cable,
FE/GE Ethernet cable, FE/GE fiber optic cable, interconnection cable between the FE electrical
ports, and interconnection cable between the FE optical ports.

7.4.1 E1/T1 Cable

An E1/T1 cable transmits baseband signals from BBU to the external transmission equipment.
The maximum length of a E1/T1 cable is 50 m (164.04 ft).

Exterior
The E1/T1 cable is of three types: 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable, 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable, and
100-ohm T1 twisted pair cable.

One end of the E1 cable is a DB26 male connector. The connector at the other end of the cable
is prepared on site based on site requirements. Figure 7-74 shows an E1/T1 cable.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 301

Figure 7-74 E1/T1 signal cable

(1) DB26 male connector

Table 7-32 lists different types of 75 ohm E1 coaxial cables.

Table 7-32 Different types of 75 ohm E1 coaxial cables

Cable One End The Other End

75 ohm E1 coaxial cable DB26 male connector L9 male connector

L9 female connector

SMB female connector

BNC male connector

SMZ male connector

SMZ female connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-33, Table 7-34, and Table 7-35 describe the pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1
cable.

Table 7-33 Pin assignment for the wires of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable

Pin on the DB26 Type(1) Coaxial Unit No. Wire Label

Male Connector

X1.1 Tip 1 RX1+

X1.2 Ring RX1-

X1.3 Tip 3 RX2+

X1.4 Ring RX2-

X1.5 Tip 5 RX3+

X1.6 Ring RX3-

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 302

Pin on the DB26 Type(1) Coaxial Unit No. Wire Label

Male Connector

X1.7 Tip 7 RX4+

X1.8 Ring RX4-

X1.19 Tip 2 TX1+

X1.20 Ring TX1-

X1.21 Tip 4 TX2+

X1.22 Ring TX2-

X1.23 Tip 6 TX3+

X1.24 Ring TX3-

X1.25 Tip 8 TX4+

X1.26 Ring TX4-

NOTE

(1) "Tip" refers to a wire in the E1 coaxial cable and "Ring" refers to an external conductor of the cable.

Table 7-34 Pin assignment for the wires of the 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable

Pin on the DB26 Wire Color Wire Type Wire Label

Male Connector

X.1 Blue Twisted pair RX1+

X.2 White RX1-

X.3 Orange Twisted pair RX2+

X.4 White RX2-

X.5 Green Twisted pair RX3+

X.6 White RX3-

X.7 Brown Twisted pair RX4+

X.8 White RX4-

X.19 Gray Twisted pair TX1+

X.20 White TX1-

X.21 Blue Twisted pair TX2+

X.22 Red TX2-

X.23 Orange Twisted pair TX3+

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 303

Pin on the DB26 Wire Color Wire Type Wire Label

Male Connector

X.24 Red TX3-

X.25 Green Twisted pair TX4+

X.26 Red TX4-

Table 7-35 Pin assignment for the wires of the 100-ohm T1 twisted pair cable

Pin on the DB26 Wire Color Wire Type Wire Label

Male Connector

X.1 Blue and white Twisted pair RX1+

X.2 White and blue RX1-

X.3 Orange and white Twisted pair RX2+

X.4 White and orange RX2-

X.5 Green and white Twisted pair RX3+

X.6 White and green RX3-

X.7 Brown and white Twisted pair RX4+

X.8 White and brown RX4-

X.19 Gray and white Twisted pair TX1+

X.20 White and gray TX1-

X.21 Blue and red Twisted pair TX2+

X.22 Red and blue TX2-

X.23 Orange and red Twisted pair TX3+

X.24 Red and orange TX3-

X.25 Green and red Twisted pair TX4+

X.26 Red and green TX4-

7.4.2 FE/GE Ethernet Cable

The FE/GE Ethernet cable connects the BBU to the external transmission equipment through
routing equipment and transmits baseband signals. The maximum length of an FE/GE Ethernet
cable is 50 m (164.04 ft).

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 304

Exterior
The FE/GE Ethernet cable is a shielded straight-through cable, which has an RJ45 connector at
each end. Figure 7-75 shows an FE/GE Ethernet cable.

Figure 7-75 FE/GE Ethernet cable

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-36 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE Ethernet cable.

Table 7-36 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE Ethernet cable

Pin on the RJ45 Wire Color Wire Type Pin on the RJ45 Connector
Connector

X1.2 Orange Twisted pair X2.2

X1.1 White and X2.1

orange

X1.6 Green Twisted pair X2.6

X1.3 White and X2.3

green

X1.4 Blue Twisted pair X2.4

X1.5 White and blue X2.5

X1.8 Brown Twisted pair X2.8

X1.7 White and X2.7

brown

7.4.3 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable

An FE/GE fiber optic cable transmits optical signals between the BBU3900 and the transmission
equipment. This cable is optional. The maximum length of an FE/GE fiber optic cable is 20 m
(65.62 ft).

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 305

Exterior
The FE/GE fiber optic cable has an LC connector at one end and an FC connector, SC connector,
or LC connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-76, Figure 7-77, Figure 7-78.

Figure 7-76 FE/GE fiber optic cable (with the FC and LC connectors)

Figure 7-77 FE/GE fiber optic cable (with the SC and LC connectors)

Figure 7-78 FE/GE fiber optic cable (with the LC connectors)

NOTICE
To connect a BBU3900 and a transmission device by using FE/GE optical fiber patch cords,
adhere to the following rules:
l The TX port on the BBU3900 must be connected to the RX port on the transmission
equipment.
l The RX port on the BBU3900 must be connected to the TX port on the transmission
equipment.

7.4.4 Interconnection Cable Between the FE Electrical Ports

This cable connects the FE electrical ports on two main control boards to enable IP-based co-
transmission.

Exterior
The interconnection cable between the FE electrical ports has an RJ45 connector at each end,
as shown in Figure 7-79.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 306

Figure 7-79 Interconnection cable between FE electrical ports

(1) RJ45 connector

7.4.5 Interconnection Cable Between FE Optical Ports

This cable connects the FE optical ports on the GTMU and WMPT to achieve co-transmission
in IP mode.

Exterior
The interconnection cable between the FE optical ports has an LC connector at each end, as
shown in Figure 7-80.

Figure 7-80 Interconnection cable between FE optical ports

(1) LC connector

7.5 Signal Cables

This chapter describes the signal cables in a BTS3900L, including the monitoring signal cable
for the fan assembly, fan assembly cascading signal cable, monitoring signal cable for the EMU,
BBU alarm cable, GPS signal cable, and ELU signal cable.

7.5.1 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU

The monitoring signal cable for the PMU transmits the environment alarm information collected
by the PMU to the BBU.

Exterior
Figure 7-81 shows the monitoring signal cable for the PMU.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 307

Figure 7-81 Monitoring signal cable for the PMU

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-37 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the
PMU.

Table 7-37 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the PMU

X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type

X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair

X1.4 X2.4 Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White Twisted pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

7.5.2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan Assembly

The monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly is used for the BBU to monitor the running
status of the fan assembly.

Exterior
Figure 7-82 shows the monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 308

Figure 7-82 Monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-38 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the fan
assembly.

Table 7-38 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly

X1 End X2 End Color Type

X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair cable

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair cable

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair cable

X1.4 X2.4 Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White Twisted pair cable

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

7.5.3 Fan Assembly Cascade Signal Cable

Fan assembly cascade signal cable is used to connect two fan assemblies.

Exterior
Figure 7-83 shows the fan assembly cascade signal cable.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 309

Figure 7-83 fan assembly cascade signal cable

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-39 describes the pin assignment of the fan assembly cascade signal cable.

Table 7-39 Pin assignment of the fan assembly cascade signal cable

X1 End X2 End Color Type

X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair cable

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair cable

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair cable

X1.4 X2.4 Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White Twisted pair cable

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

7.5.4 Monitoring Signal Cable for the EMU

The monitoring signal cable for the EMU transmits monitoring signals from the EMU to the
BBU.

Exterior
Figure 7-84 shows the monitoring signal cable for the EMU.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 310

Figure 7-84 Monitoring signal cable for the EMU

(1) RJ45 connector (2) DB9 male connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-40 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the
EMU.

Table 7-40 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the EMU

Pin on the Pin on the DB9 Wire Color Wire Type Label
RJ45 Male Connector
Connector

X1.1 X2.3 White Twisted pair TX+

X1.2 X2.7 Orange TX-

X1.5 X2.6 White Twisted pair RX-

X1.4 X2.2 Blue RX+

7.5.5 BBU interconnection signal cable

The BBU interconnection signal cable connects BBU0 and BBU1 to forward information
between the BBUs.

Cable Type
BBU interconnection signal cables are classified into different types based on their functions,
as listed in Table 7-41.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 311

Table 7-41 Cable type

Cable Function Installation Position

BBU interconnection signal Forwards control and Connects the UMPT and the
cable synchronization information UCIU
from one BBU to another

Forwards baseband Interconnects two WBBPf

information from one BBU to boards
another

Exterior
l The BBU interconnection signal cable connecting UCIU to UMPT forwards control and
synchronization information from one BBU to another. When two BBUs are installed in
the same cabinet, the BBU interconnection signal cable is 2 meters long, as shown in Figure
7-85. When two BBUs are installed in two cabinets, the BBU interconnection signal cable
is 10 meters long, as shown in Figure 7-86.

Figure 7-85 BBU interconnection signal cable (1)

(1) DLC connector (2) Breakout cable

Figure 7-86 BBU interconnection signal cable (2)

(1) DLC connector (2) Armoured cable (3) Breakout cable

l The BBU interconnection signal cable connecting WBBPf to WBBPf forwards baseband
information from one BBU to another, as shown in Figure 7-87. When two BBUs are
installed in the same cabinet, the BBU interconnection signal cable is 2 meters long. When
two BBUs are installed in two cabinets, the BBU interconnection signal cable is 10 meters
long.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 312

Figure 7-87 BBU interconnection signal cable (3)

(1) QSFP connector (2) QSFP connector

7.5.6 BBU Alarm Cable

A BBU alarm cable transmits alarm signals from external alarm equipment to a BBU. The
maximum length of a BBU alarm cable is 20 m (65.62 ft).

Exterior
The BBU alarm cable has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-88. One RJ45
connector at one end, however, may be removed and an appropriate terminal may be added
according to the field requirements.

Figure 7-88 BBU alarm cable

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-42 shows the wire sequence of the BBU alarm cable.

Table 7-42 Pin assignment for the wires of the BBU alarm cable

BBU Pin on the Wire Wire Pin on the Description

Alarm RJ45 Color Type RJ45
Port Connecto Connecto
r r

EXT- X1.1 White and Twisted X2.1 Boolean input 4+

ALM1 orange pair

X1.2 Orange X2.2 Boolean input 4- (GND)

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 313

BBU Pin on the Wire Wire Pin on the Description

Alarm RJ45 Color Type RJ45
Port Connecto Connecto
r r

X1.3 White and Twisted X2.3 Boolean input 5+

green pair

X1.6 Green X2.6 Boolean input 5- (GND)

X1.5 White and Twisted X2.5 Boolean input 6+

blue pair

X1.4 Blue X2.4 Boolean input 6- (GND)

X1.7 White and Twisted X2.7 Boolean input 7+

brown pair

X1.8 Brown X2.8 Boolean input 7- (GND)

EXT- X1.1 White and Twisted X2.1 Boolean input 0+

ALM0 orange pair

X1.2 Orange X2.2 Boolean input 0+

(GND)

X1.3 White and Twisted X2.3 Boolean input 1+

green pair

X1.6 Green X2.6 Boolean input 1- (GND)

X1.5 White and Twisted X2.5 Boolean input 2+

blue pair

X1.4 Blue X2.4 Boolean input 2- (GND)

X1.7 White and Twisted X2.7 Boolean input 3+

brown pair

X1.8 Brown X2.8 Boolean input 3- (GND)

7.5.7 GPS Clock Signal Cable

The GPS clock signal cable is used to transmit GPS clock signals from the GPS antenna system
to the BBU. The GPS clock signals serve as the clock reference of the BBU. This cable is
optional.

Exterior
The GPS clock signal cable has an SMA male connector at one end and an N-type female
connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-89.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 314

Figure 7-89 GPS clock signal cable

(1) SMA male connector (2) N-type female connector

7.5.8 GPS Jumper

This section describes a GPS jumper that is used when a GPS surge protector is installed in a
cabinet. The maximum length of a GPS jumper is 100 m (328.08 ft).

Exterior
There are N50 straight male connectors at both ends of a GPS jumper, which connects the GPS
surge protector and GPS antenna. Figure 7-90 shows a GPS jumper.

Figure 7-90 GPS jumper

(1) N50 straight male connector

7.5.9 Signal Cable for the ELU

The signal cable for the ELU is used to report the cabinet type information detected by the ELU
to the fan assembly.

Exterior
Figure 7-91 shows the signal cable for the ELU.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 315

Figure 7-91 Signal cable for the ELU

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-43 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the signal cable for the ELU.

Table 7-43 Pin assignment for the wires of the signal cable for the ELU

X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type

X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair

X1.4 X2.4 Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White Twisted pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

7.5.10 Monitoring Signal Cable for the GATM

This cable connects the BBU and GATM, enabling the BBU to transmit control signals to the
GATM and enabling the GATM to report alarms to the BBU.

Structure
Figure 7-92 shows the monitoring signal cable for the GATM.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 316

Figure 7-92 Monitoring signal cable for the GATM

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-44 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the
GATM.

Table 7-44 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the GATM

X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type

X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair

X1.4 X2.4 Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White Twisted pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

7.5.11 FMUEA-GATM Monitoring Signal Cable

A FMUEA-GATM monitoring signal cable connects the GATM and the FMUEA in fan
assembly. It transmits monitoring signals collected by the FMUEA to the GATM.

Exterior
The following figure shows the exterior of a FMUEA-GATM monitoring signal cable.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 317

Figure 7-93 Exterior of a FMUEA-GATM monitoring signal cable

(1) RJ45 connector

Description
The following table describes a FMUEA-GATM monitoring signal cable.

Table 7-45 FMUEA-GATM monitoring signal cable

X1 End X2 End Color Wire Type

X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair

X1.4 X2.4 Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White Twisted pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

7.5.12 Monitoring Signal Cables for the Temperature Sensor

A monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor in an RFC, OMB, IBBS200D, IBBS200T,
BTS3900AL, IMS06, APM30 (Ver.D_A1), RFC (Ver.D_A) cabinet reports the temperature
information to the monitoring board.

Exterior
Figure 7-94, Figure 7-95 show exteriors of monitoring signal cables for the temperature sensor.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 318

Figure 7-94 Monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor (one)

(1) Temperature sensor (2) 4-pin connector

Figure 7-95 Monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor (two)

(1) 4-pin connector (2) 5-pin connector

Monitoring Boards
The following table lists monitoring boards to which the temperature information is reported.

7.5.13 RET Control Signal Cable

The RET control signal cable is used to connect the GATM and the Bias-Tee, enabling the
GATM to supply power to the TMA and to control the RET antenna.

Exterior
Figure 7-96 shows the exterior of a RET control signal cable.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 319

Figure 7-96 Exterior of a RET control signal cable

(1) SMA elbow male connector (2) SMA straight male connector

7.5.14 Cable Between two Combined Base Stations

When a 3012 series base station and a 3900 series base station are installed side-by-side, the
cable between two combined base stations is used to connect the universal cascading interface
unit (UCIU) in the 3900 series base station and the cabinet top backplane for DTRU BTS (DCTB)
or DGLUb in the 3012 series base station.

Exterior
There are two types of cables that can be used to connect two combined base stations. Figure
7-97 shows the cable connected to the DCTB in the 3012 series base station.

Figure 7-97 Cable between two combined base stations (1)

(1) MD36 male connector (2) DB15 male connector

Figure 7-98 shows the cable connected to the DGLUb in the 3012 series base station.

Figure 7-98 Cable between two combined base stations (2)

(1) DB15 male connector

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 320

Pin Assignment
As shown in Figure 7-97, the cable has a DB15 male connector at one end and an MD36 male
connector at the other end. Table 7-46 lists the pin assignment for the wires of the cable.

Table 7-46 Pin assignment for the wires of the cable between two combined base stations (1)

Pin on the DB15 Pin on the MD36 Color Wire Type

Male Connector Male Connector

X1.1 X2.6 White Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.7 Blue

X1.3 X2.11 White Twisted pair

X1.4 X2.12 Orange

X1.5 X2.2 White Twisted pair

X1.10 X2.3 Green

X1.6 X2.15 White Twisted pair

X1.11 X2.16 Brown

X1.12 X2.10 White Twisted pair

X1.15 X2.28 Gray

X1.shell X2.shell Shield -

As shown in Figure 7-98, the cable has a DB15 male connector at both ends. Table 7-47 lists
the pin assignment for the wires of the cable.

Table 7-47 Pin assignment for the wires of the cable between two combined base stations (2)

Pin on the DB15 Pin on the DB15 Color Wire Type

Male Connector Male Connector

X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Blue

X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair

X1.4 X2.4 Orange

X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair

X1.10 X2.10 Green

X1.6 X2.6 White Twisted pair

X1.11 X2.11 Brown

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 321

Pin on the DB15 Pin on the DB15 Color Wire Type

Male Connector Male Connector

X1.12 X2.12 White Twisted pair

X1.15 X2.15 Gray

X1.shell X2.shell Shield -

7.5.15 Adapter Used for Local Maintenance

An adapter used for local maintenance connects the USB port on the UMPT to an Ethernet cable
during local maintenance.

Exterior
The adapter used for local maintenance has a USB connector at one end and an Ethernet
connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-99.

Figure 7-99 Adapter used for local maintenance

(1) USB connector (2) Ethernet connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-48 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the adapter used for local maintenance.

Table 7-48 Pin assignment for the wires of the adapter used for local maintenance

Pin of the USB Wire Color Wire Type Pin of the Ethernet
Connector Connector

X1.9 Blue Twisted pair X2.1

X1.8 White X2.2

X1.6 Orange Twisted pair X2.3

X1.5 White X2.6

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 322

Pin of the USB Wire Color Wire Type Pin of the Ethernet
Connector Connector

X1.Shell - Shield X2.Shell

7.6 RF Cables
This chapter describes the RF cables in a BTS3900L, including the RF jumper and inter-RFU
RF signal cable.

7.6.1 RF Jumper
The RF jumper connects the RFU and the feeder of the antenna system for signal exchange
between the base station and the antenna system. A fixed-length RF jumper is 2 m (6.56 ft), 3
m (9.84 ft), 4 m (13.12 ft), 6 m (19.68 ft), or 10 m (32.81 ft) long. A variable-length RF jumper
has a maximum length of 6 m (19.68 ft).

Exterior
Figure 7-100 shows an RF jumper.

Figure 7-100 RF jumper

(1) DIN straight male connector (2) DIN elbow male connector

NOTE

Macro base stations use super-flexible 1/2-inch jumpers.

7.6.2 Inter-RFU RF Signal Cable

The inter-RFU RF signal cable is used for transmitting the received diversity signals between
two RFUs. The cable connects the RX IN port on one RFU and the RX OUT port on another
RFU.

Structure
Figure 7-101 shows the inter-RFU RF signal cable.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 323

Figure 7-101 Inter-RFU RF signal cable

(1) QMA elbow male connector

7.7 CPRI Electrical Cable

The CPRI electrical cable enables high speed communication between the BBU3900 and the
RFU.

Exterior
The CPRI electrical cable is an SFP high speed transmission cable that has an SFP20 male
connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-102.

Figure 7-102 CPRI electrical cable

7.8 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable

CPRI fiber optic cables are classified into multimode fiber optic cables and single-mode fiber
optic cables. They transmit CPRI signals.

Multimode fiber optic cables connect the BBU and RRU or interconnect two RRUs. The
maximum length of the multimode fiber optic cable between the BBU and RRU is 150 m (492.12
ft) and the multimode fiber optic cable between two RRUs has a fixed length of 10 m (32.81 ft).

A single-mode fiber optic cable consists of the single-mode pigtail and trunk single-mode fiber
optic cable, and the single-mode pigtail and trunk single-mode fiber optic cable are
interconnected using the ODF. The maximum length of the single-mode pigtail is 20 m (65.62
ft) on BBU side and 70 m (229.66 ft) on RRU side.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 324

NOTE

l The ODF and trunk single-mode fiber optic cable are provided by the customer and must comply with
the ITU-T G.652 standard.
l The ODF is an outdoor transfer box for fiber optic cables, which interconnects the single-mode pigtail
and trunk single-mode fiber optic cable.
l A multimode fiber optic cable and a single-mode fiber optic cable are connected to a multimode optical
module and a single-mode optical module, respectively.

Exterior
Multimode fiber optic cable: The multimode fiber optic cable has a DLC connector at each end,
as shown in Figure 7-103.

Figure 7-103 Multimode fiber optic cable

(1) DLC connector (2) Breakout cable (3) Label on the breakout cable

NOTE

l When a multimode fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the breakout cable on the BBU side
is 0.34 m (1.12 ft) and the breakout cable on the RRU side is 0.03 m (0.098 ft).
l When a multimode fiber optic cable connects two RRUs, the breakout cable on both sides is 0.03 m
(0.098 ft).

Figure 7-104 shows the connection of the multimode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an
RRU.

Figure 7-104 Connection of the multimode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU

(1) Multimode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 325

Single-mode pigtail: The single-mode pigtail has a DLC connector at one end and an FC, LC,
or SC connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-105.

Figure 7-105 Single-mode pigtail

(1) DLC connector (2) Breakout (3) Label on the (4) FC connector (5) LC connector (6) SC connector
cable breakout cable

NOTE

l When a single-mode pigtail connects a BBU and an ODF, the breakout cables on the BBU side and
ODF side are 0.34 m (1.12 ft) and 0.8 m (2.62 ft), respectively.
l When a single-mode pigtail connects an RRU and an ODF, the breakout cables on the RRU side and
ODF side are 0.03 m (0.098 ft) and 0.8 m (2.62 ft), respectively.

Figure 7-106 shows the connection of the single-mode pigtail.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 326

Figure 7-106 Connection of the single-mode pigtail

(1) Single-mode pigtail between a BBU and an ODF (2) Single-mode pigtail between an RRU and an ODF

Selection Principles
The following table describes the principles for selecting CPRI fiber optic cables.

Table 7-49 Principles for selecting CPRI fiber optic cables

Remote Selection Principle Remarks

Distance

Less than or Multimode fiber optic cable Connects the BBU and RRU
equal to 100 m When it connects two RRUs, the distance
(328.08 ft) between the two RRUs must be equal to or
less than 10 m (32.81 ft).

Greater than Multimode fiber optic cable Connects the BBU and RRU
100 m (328.08
ft) and equal to Recommended: single-mode The single-mode pigtail at the RRU or BBU
or less than fiber optic cable (single-mode side is connected to the trunk single-mode
150 m (492.12 pigtail and trunk single-mode fiber optic cable using the ODF.
ft) fiber optic cable)

Greater than Single-mode fiber optic cable

150 m (492.12 (single-mode pigtail and trunk
ft) single-mode fiber optic cable)

Pin Assignment
Table 7-50 describes the labels on and recommended connections for the breakout cables of a
CPRI fiber optic cable.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 327

Table 7-50 Labels on and recommended connections for the breakout cables of a CPRI fiber
optic cable

Label Installation Position

Multimode Fiber Multimode Fiber Single-Mode Pigtail

Optic Cable Optic Cable
Between a BBU Between Two
and an RRU RRUs

1A CPRI RX port on the CPRI RX port on RX port on the BBU or

RRU RRU 1 CPRI RX port on the
RRU

1B CPRI TX port on the CPRI TX port on TX port on the BBU or

RRU RRU 1 CPRI TX port on the
RRU

2A TX port on the BBU CPRI TX port on ODF

RRU 0

2B RX port on the BBU CPRI RX port on ODF

RRU 0

7.9 PGND Cables

The PGND cables are used to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet and the modules in the
cabinet. The maximum length of a PGND cable is 15 m (49.21 ft).

PGND Cable for the Cabinet

The PGND cable for the cabinet is green and yellow. Figure 7-107 shows the PGND cable for
the cabinet.

Figure 7-107 PGND cable for the cabinet

(1) OT terminal (25 mm2 or 16 mm2, M8)

NOTE

l For the BTS3900 (Ver.B) or BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet, the cross-sectional area of the PGND cable is
25 mm2 (0.039 in.2).
l For the BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet, the PGND cable with a cross-sectional area of 25 mm2 (0.039 in.
2) is required when one 160 A upper-level circuit breaker is used, and the PGND cable with a cross-

sectional area of 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2) is required when two 80 A upper-level circuit breaker is used.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 328

PGND Cable for the Modules

The PGND cable for the modules is green and yellow with a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2.
Figure 7-108 shows the PGND cable for the modules.

Figure 7-108 PGND cable for the modules

(1) OT terminal (6 mm2, M4)

7.10 Equipotential Cables

Equipotential cables connect the PGND terminals of two cabinets. Equipotential cables ensure
that cabinets are equipotential and that base stations run properly.

Exterior
The following figure shows the exteriors of equipotential cables.

Figure 7-109 Exteriors of equipotential cables

(1) OT terminal (M6)

NOTE

In most cases, equipotential cables with green and yellow color are used. When 110 V dual-live-wire power
is supplied to a BTS3900A (Ver.C) or BTS3900A (Ver.D), equipotential cables with green color are used.

Description
The following table describes equipotential cables.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 329

Table 7-51 Equipotential cables

Cabinet Type Cable Specifications

Stacked or side-by-side BTS3900 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)

(Ver.B) cabinets
Stacked or side-by-side BTS3900
(Ver.C) cabinets
Stacked or side-by-side BTS3900
(Ver.D) cabinets
BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet stacked on an
IMS06

BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet stacked on 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)

an IMS06

Stacked or side-by-side cabinets 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)

including APM30H (Ver.B), RFC
(Ver.B), IBBS200D/IBBS200T
(Ver.B), and TMC11H (Ver.B)

Stacked or side-by-side cabinets The cross-sectional areas of cables vary depending

including APM30H (Ver.C), RFC on the way that cabinets are combined.
(Ver.C), IBBS200D/IBBS200T
l 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2) for stacked cabinets
(Ver.C), and TMC11H (Ver.C)
l 25 mm2 (0.039 in.2) for side-by-side cabinets

Stacked or side-by-side cabinets 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)

including APM30H (Ver.D), RFC
(Ver.D), IBBS200D/IBBS200T
(Ver.D), IBBS700D/IBBS700T
(Ver.D), and TMC11H (Ver.D)

BTS3900AL (Ver.A) AC and 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2)

BTS3900AL (Ver.A) DC cabinets
installed side by side
BTS3900AL (Ver.A) AC cabinet and
IBBS700D/IBBS700T installed side by
side

BTS3900AL (Ver.A) AC cabinet and 25mm2 (0.039 in.2)

TMC11H (Ver.D) installed side by
side.

Issue 08 (2014-06-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 330

3900 & 5900 Series Base Station Maintenance Guide (26) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
3900 & 5900 Series Base Station Maintenance Guide (26) (PDF) - EN
1,108 pages
BBU Hardware Description (V100R009C00 - 03) (PDF) - en
No ratings yet
BBU Hardware Description (V100R009C00 - 03) (PDF) - en
194 pages
BBU5900A Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
100% (1)
BBU5900A Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
151 pages
3900 & 5900 Series Base Station Model Description (15) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
3900 & 5900 Series Base Station Model Description (15) (PDF) - EN
893 pages
Smu02b User Manual v200r001c00 02 PDF
100% (1)
Smu02b User Manual v200r001c00 02 PDF
209 pages
3900 & 5900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide (V100R018C10 - 04) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
3900 & 5900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide (V100R018C10 - 04) (PDF) - EN
330 pages
SMU02B V300R002C10 User Manual 01 Path1
No ratings yet
SMU02B V300R002C10 User Manual 01 Path1
130 pages
HUAWEI Telecom Energy Solutions Catalog
No ratings yet
HUAWEI Telecom Energy Solutions Catalog
17 pages
BBU3900 Hardware Description (V100R008C00 - 07) (PDF) - en
100% (1)
BBU3900 Hardware Description (V100R008C00 - 07) (PDF) - en
136 pages
BBU5900 Hardware Description
100% (2)
BBU5900 Hardware Description
8 pages
Powercube1000 Installation and Commissioning
No ratings yet
Powercube1000 Installation and Commissioning
124 pages
3900 Series Base Station Technical Description (V100R010C10 - 07) (PDF) - en
No ratings yet
3900 Series Base Station Technical Description (V100R010C10 - 07) (PDF) - en
1,101 pages
MTS9514A-BX2001 & MTS9514A-DX2001 V100R001 User Manual 01
100% (1)
MTS9514A-BX2001 & MTS9514A-DX2001 V100R001 User Manual 01
67 pages
Huawei DC1 - TP48300A-DX15A1 & Extension User Manual
100% (1)
Huawei DC1 - TP48300A-DX15A1 & Extension User Manual
87 pages
BBU5900 Description - 10 (20190330)
100% (4)
BBU5900 Description - 10 (20190330)
95 pages
BTS3900 V100R010C10SPC120 (NodeB) Release Notes
No ratings yet
BTS3900 V100R010C10SPC120 (NodeB) Release Notes
555 pages
Power Supply Management (SRAN15.1 - Draft B)
100% (1)
Power Supply Management (SRAN15.1 - Draft B)
86 pages
BTS3900A GSM Hardware Description (II) - (V300 - 07)
100% (1)
BTS3900A GSM Hardware Description (II) - (V300 - 07)
220 pages
MTS9300A V100R001C00 Telecom Power User Manual
No ratings yet
MTS9300A V100R001C00 Telecom Power User Manual
155 pages
BBU3910 Description - 25 (20190330)
100% (1)
BBU3910 Description - 25 (20190330)
89 pages
MTS9000A V100R002C30 Telecom Power Installation Guide (MTS9514A-DM20E1, MTS9514A-DM16E1)
No ratings yet
MTS9000A V100R002C30 Telecom Power Installation Guide (MTS9514A-DM20E1, MTS9514A-DM16E1)
87 pages
RTN 320 V100R009C00 Product Description 02 PDF
No ratings yet
RTN 320 V100R009C00 Product Description 02 PDF
227 pages
EMUB User Guide
No ratings yet
EMUB User Guide
58 pages
APM30 User Guide (V100R004C01 - 04)
100% (1)
APM30 User Guide (V100R004C01 - 04)
205 pages
Neteco
80% (5)
Neteco
59 pages
MTS9302A Installation Procedures 19.07.2022 - V3
100% (1)
MTS9302A Installation Procedures 19.07.2022 - V3
71 pages
OTA External Alarm Solution V1 18 - Final
100% (1)
OTA External Alarm Solution V1 18 - Final
32 pages
Huawei BTS 3900
100% (10)
Huawei BTS 3900
34 pages
Product Description HUAWEI BTS3900A
No ratings yet
Product Description HUAWEI BTS3900A
52 pages
HUAWEI Rectifier - Installation and Commisioning WI - V0
No ratings yet
HUAWEI Rectifier - Installation and Commisioning WI - V0
16 pages
NR Protocol PDF
No ratings yet
NR Protocol PDF
835 pages
Bbu Alarm Descriptions
No ratings yet
Bbu Alarm Descriptions
36 pages
BTS3900L Ver C Hardware Description 07 PDF en
No ratings yet
BTS3900L Ver C Hardware Description 07 PDF en
227 pages
BTS3900A&DBS3900 Hardware Description For Enhanced Cabinets (01) (PDF) - en
No ratings yet
BTS3900A&DBS3900 Hardware Description For Enhanced Cabinets (01) (PDF) - en
223 pages
BTS3900A (Ver.D) Installation Guide (05) (PDF) - en
No ratings yet
BTS3900A (Ver.D) Installation Guide (05) (PDF) - en
246 pages
BTS3900AL
100% (1)
BTS3900AL
337 pages
HUAWEI GSM BTS3900 Hardware Structure-20080728-ISSUE4.0
100% (5)
HUAWEI GSM BTS3900 Hardware Structure-20080728-ISSUE4.0
64 pages
ICC500 Power Cube Manual
100% (1)
ICC500 Power Cube Manual
47 pages
Bbu & Rru
No ratings yet
Bbu & Rru
37 pages
BBU5900A Hardware Description (V100R016C00 - 02) (PDF) - en
No ratings yet
BBU5900A Hardware Description (V100R016C00 - 02) (PDF) - en
73 pages
SPA CLAIM Check Cash
100% (1)
SPA CLAIM Check Cash
1 page
2 BSC RNC 6900 Hardware Structure and System Description 2
No ratings yet
2 BSC RNC 6900 Hardware Structure and System Description 2
33 pages
Fundamentals of Political Science - Important Notes
No ratings yet
Fundamentals of Political Science - Important Notes
90 pages
Installation Guide: BTS3900L (Ver.C)
No ratings yet
Installation Guide: BTS3900L (Ver.C)
119 pages
HUAWEI DCDU Datasheet
100% (1)
HUAWEI DCDU Datasheet
1 page
Change of Name
100% (1)
Change of Name
2 pages
Guideline Replacing WMPT With UMPT
No ratings yet
Guideline Replacing WMPT With UMPT
5 pages
BTS3900 (Ver.D) Installation Guide (V100R009C00 - 03) (PDF) - en
No ratings yet
BTS3900 (Ver.D) Installation Guide (V100R009C00 - 03) (PDF) - en
175 pages
BTS3900A (Ver B) Installation Guide (02) (PDF) - EN PDF
No ratings yet
BTS3900A (Ver B) Installation Guide (02) (PDF) - EN PDF
176 pages
BBU3900 Hardware Description
No ratings yet
BBU3900 Hardware Description
81 pages
BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description (07) (PDF) - en
No ratings yet
BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description (07) (PDF) - en
276 pages
LionRock Telecom Energy190521
100% (1)
LionRock Telecom Energy190521
39 pages
TP48200 +RFC Installation Guide-V4
No ratings yet
TP48200 +RFC Installation Guide-V4
44 pages
PowerCube 1000 (With An ICC500-HA) Quick Installation Guide (V300R002C00 - 024 Reusing Existing DG & ATS)
100% (6)
PowerCube 1000 (With An ICC500-HA) Quick Installation Guide (V300R002C00 - 024 Reusing Existing DG & ATS)
20 pages
Huawei Rectifier DG Setting
No ratings yet
Huawei Rectifier DG Setting
3 pages
BBU Interconnection (SRAN9.0 - Draft A)
No ratings yet
BBU Interconnection (SRAN9.0 - Draft A)
51 pages
APM30 Introduction
No ratings yet
APM30 Introduction
38 pages
Rrus Huawei
No ratings yet
Rrus Huawei
35 pages
1-DBS Hardware Introduction
No ratings yet
1-DBS Hardware Introduction
10 pages
Huawei Optix RTN 950a Datasheet
No ratings yet
Huawei Optix RTN 950a Datasheet
4 pages
External Alarm Schematic
No ratings yet
External Alarm Schematic
6 pages
Cis Mekolor JSC - Vietinbank
No ratings yet
Cis Mekolor JSC - Vietinbank
5 pages
RRU3829 Description
No ratings yet
RRU3829 Description
10 pages
Handout 8 Comparative Table of Hearsay Exceptions (Unavailability of Declarant Immaterial)
No ratings yet
Handout 8 Comparative Table of Hearsay Exceptions (Unavailability of Declarant Immaterial)
1 page
RRU
No ratings yet
RRU
9 pages
Certificate Of: Land Use Rights Dwelling House Ownership and Other Assets Attached To Land
No ratings yet
Certificate Of: Land Use Rights Dwelling House Ownership and Other Assets Attached To Land
2 pages
Information Brochure COAP2025
No ratings yet
Information Brochure COAP2025
17 pages
Certified Public Accountant (CPA)
No ratings yet
Certified Public Accountant (CPA)
7 pages
1987 Philippine Constitution
No ratings yet
1987 Philippine Constitution
103 pages
BROCHURE - The Juror League Moot Court Competition, 2025
No ratings yet
BROCHURE - The Juror League Moot Court Competition, 2025
14 pages
57-60 Civrev
No ratings yet
57-60 Civrev
5 pages
L2 - 5.2 - Cash Discounts
No ratings yet
L2 - 5.2 - Cash Discounts
6 pages
Assylum Seekers Japan
No ratings yet
Assylum Seekers Japan
8 pages
Momentum Principle and Flow Analysis (6 Hours)
No ratings yet
Momentum Principle and Flow Analysis (6 Hours)
17 pages
International Accounting Standard 7 Statement of Cash Flows
No ratings yet
International Accounting Standard 7 Statement of Cash Flows
8 pages
Capacity To Contract
No ratings yet
Capacity To Contract
20 pages
Growth Saver
No ratings yet
Growth Saver
9 pages
Property List - ST - Bernard - Parish-Lien-2022-06-22
No ratings yet
Property List - ST - Bernard - Parish-Lien-2022-06-22
21 pages
Whitepaper: Delancer - Io
No ratings yet
Whitepaper: Delancer - Io
15 pages
Helen DeWitt Stalker
No ratings yet
Helen DeWitt Stalker
7 pages
SFA Licence To Manufacture and Process of Animal Feed 2022
No ratings yet
SFA Licence To Manufacture and Process of Animal Feed 2022
3 pages
Reviewer 1 Philippine History LET
No ratings yet
Reviewer 1 Philippine History LET
2 pages
Eo 522
No ratings yet
Eo 522
2 pages
Walk by The Spirit!: Galatians 5:19-26
No ratings yet
Walk by The Spirit!: Galatians 5:19-26
4 pages
InstallationGuide 530 531 532
No ratings yet
InstallationGuide 530 531 532
20 pages
Job Application UDC
No ratings yet
Job Application UDC
1 page
Executive Order 292 - Administrative Code of 1987 Chapter 7. Expenditure of Appropriated Funds Section 58
No ratings yet
Executive Order 292 - Administrative Code of 1987 Chapter 7. Expenditure of Appropriated Funds Section 58
6 pages
Acuna v. CA
No ratings yet
Acuna v. CA
7 pages
DBP v. CA
No ratings yet
DBP v. CA
4 pages
Voice over LTE Standard Requirements
From Everand
Voice over LTE Standard Requirements
Gerardus Blokdyk
3/5 (1)